summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/53361-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/53361-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--old/53361-0.txt8100
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8100 deletions
diff --git a/old/53361-0.txt b/old/53361-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 83d87e6..0000000
--- a/old/53361-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8100 +0,0 @@
-Project Gutenberg's Patsy Carroll Under Southern Skies, by Grace Gordon
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
-other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
-the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have
-to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook.
-
-Title: Patsy Carroll Under Southern Skies
-
-Author: Grace Gordon
-
-Illustrator: R. Emmet Owen
-
-Release Date: October 25, 2016 [EBook #53361]
-
-Language: English
-
-Character set encoding: UTF-8
-
-*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PATSY CARROLL UNDER SOUTHERN SKIES ***
-
-
-
-
-Produced by Juliet Sutherland and the Online Distributed
-Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration: Something suddenly shot out from the table end.]
-
-
-
-
- _Patsy Carroll
- Under
- Southern Skies_
-
- _By
- Grace Gordon_
-
- _Illustrated by
- R. Emmet Owen_
-
- _New York_
- _Cupples & Leon Company_
-
-
-
-
- PATSY CARROLL SERIES
- BY GRACE GORDON
-
- PATSY CARROLL AT WILDERNESS LODGE
- PATSY CARROLL UNDER SOUTHERN SKIES
-
- _Other Volumes in Preparation_
-
- CUPPLES & LEON COMPANY, New York
-
- COPYRIGHT, 1918, BY
- CUPPLES & LEON COMPANY
-
- Patsy Carroll Under Southern Skies
-
- Printed in U. S. A.
-
-
-
-
-CONTENTS
-
-
- CHAPTER PAGE
-
- I TIME TO GO WAYFARING AGAIN 1
-
- II A HARD-HEARTED REGISTRAR 11
-
- III NO LOSS WITHOUT GAIN 20
-
- IV GLORIOUS NEWS 29
-
- V THE LAND OF FLOWERS 43
-
- VI THE BEGINNING OF NEW ADVENTURE 58
-
- VII THE COTTAGE IN THE PALM GROVE 72
-
- VIII PATSY SCENTS A MYSTERY 82
-
- IX THE WOOD NYMPH 93
-
- X GETTING ACQUAINTED WITH OLD OCEAN 105
-
- XI A TIMID CALLER 113
-
- XII INTERVIEWING CARLOS 122
-
- XIII TWO LETTERS 134
-
- XIV A REAL ADVENTURE 146
-
- XV DOLORES 157
-
- XVI NOTHING OR SOMETHING? 166
-
- XVII PUZZLING OVER THE PUZZLE 179
-
- XVIII SOMETHING! 190
-
- XIX PATSY’S SCHEME 204
-
- XX THE WAY THE SCHEME WORKED OUT 217
-
- XXI THE GHOST 227
-
- XXII THE RETURN OF DOLORES 237
-
- XXIII THE MEMENTO 244
-
- XXIV THE SECRET DRAWER 252
-
- XXV WHAT THE SECRET DRAWER HELD 261
-
- XXVI “THE TRUE SIGN OF THE ‘DRAGON’” 286
-
- XXVII THE TREASURE OF LAS GOLONDRINAS 299
-
-
-
-
-_Patsy Carroll Under Southern Skies_
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER I
-
-TIME TO GO WAYFARING AGAIN
-
-
-“Oh, dear!” loudly sighed Patsy Carroll.
-
-The regretful exclamation was accompanied by the energetic banging of
-Patsy’s French grammar upon the table.
-
-“Stay there, tiresome old thing!” she emphasized. “I’ve had enough of
-you for one evening.”
-
-“What’s the matter, Patsy?”
-
-Beatrice Forbes raised mildly inquiring eyes from the theme she was
-industriously engaged in writing.
-
-“Lots of things. I hate French verbs. The crazy old irregular ones most
-of all. They start out one thing and by the time you get to the future
-tense they’re something entirely different.”
-
-“Is that all?” smiled Beatrice. “You ought to be used to them by this
-time.”
-
-“That’s only one of my troubles,” frowned Patsy. “There are others
-a great deal worse. One of them is this Easter vacation business. I
-thought we’d surely have three weeks. It’s always been so at Yardley
-until this year. Two weeks is no vacation worth mentioning.”
-
-“Well, that’s plenty of time to go home in and stay at home and see the
-folks for a while, isn’t it?” asked Beatrice.
-
-“But we didn’t intend going _home_,” protested Patsy.
-
-“Didn’t intend going home?” repeated Beatrice wonderingly. “_What_ are
-you talking about, Patsy Carroll? _I_ certainly expect to go home for
-Easter.”
-
-“You only think you do,” Patsy assured, her troubled face relaxing into
-a mischievous grin. “Maybe you will, though. I don’t know. It depends
-upon what kind of scheme my gigantic brain can think up.
-
-“It’s like this, Bee,” she continued, noting her friend’s expression of
-mystification. “Father and I made a peach of a plan. Excuse my slang,
-but ‘peach of a plan’ just expresses it. Well, when I was at home over
-Christmas, Father promised me that the Wayfarers should join him and
-Aunt Martha at Palm Beach for the Easter vacation. He bought some land
-down in Florida last fall. Orange groves and all that, you know. This
-land isn’t so very far from Palm Beach. He was going down there right
-after Christmas, but a lot of business prevented him from going. He’s
-down there now, though, and----”
-
-“You’ve been keeping all this a dead secret from your little chums,”
-finished Beatrice with pretended reproach.
-
-“Of course I have,” calmly asserted Patsy. “That was to be part of the
-fun. I meant to spring a fine surprise on you girls. Your mother knows
-all about it. So does Mrs. Perry. I went around and asked them if you
-and Mab and Nellie could go while I was at home during the Christmas
-holidays. Aunt Martha liked my plan, too. Now we’ll have to give it up
-and go somewhere nearer home. We’d hardly get settled at Palm Beach
-when we’d have to come right home again. One more week’s vacation would
-make a lot of difference. And we can’t have it! It’s simply too mean
-for anything!”
-
-“It would be wonderful to go to Palm Beach,” mused Beatrice. “It would
-be to me, anyway. You know I’ve never traveled as you have, Patsy.
-Going to the Adirondacks last summer was my first real trip away from
-home. Going to Florida would seem like going to fairy land.”
-
-Readers of “PATSY CARROLL AT WILDERNESS LODGE,” are already well
-acquainted, not only with Patsy Carroll and Beatrice Forbes, but also
-with their chums, Mabel and Eleanor Perry. In this story was narrated
-the adventures of the four young girls, who, chaperoned by Patsy’s
-stately aunt, Miss Martha Carroll, spent a summer together in the
-Adirondacks.
-
-Wilderness Lodge, the luxurious “camp” leased by Mr. Carroll for the
-summer, had formerly belonged to an eccentric old man, Ebeneezer
-Wellington. Having died intestate the previous spring, his property
-and money had passed into the hands of Rupert Grandin, his worthless
-nephew, leaving his foster-daughter, Cecil Vane, penniless.
-
-Hardly were the Wayfarers, as the four girls had named themselves,
-established at the Lodge when its owner decided, for reasons of his
-own, to oust them from his property. A chance meeting between Beatrice
-and Cecil Vane revealed the knowledge that the latter had been
-defrauded of her rights and was firm in the belief that her late uncle
-had made a will in her favor, which was tucked away in some corner of
-the Lodge.
-
-The long-continued hunt for the missing will and the strange
-circumstances which attended the finding of it furnished the Wayfarers
-with a new kind of excitement, quite apart from other memorable
-incidents and adventures which crowded the summer.
-
-In the end, Cecil came into her own, and the Wayfarers returned to
-Morton, their home town, to make ready to enter Yardley, a preparatory
-school, in which Mabel, Eleanor and Patsy were to put in another year
-of study before entering college.
-
-When Beatrice Forbes had joined the chums on the eventful vacation in
-the mountains, she had fully expected on her return to Morton to become
-a teacher in one of the grade schools. Fortune, however, had smiled
-kindly on her. Her great-aunt, whom her mother had visited that summer
-for the first time, had exhibited a lively interest in the great-niece
-whom she had never seen.
-
-Learning from Mrs. Forbes, Beatrice’s longing ambition to obtain a
-college education, she had privately decided to accompany Beatrice’s
-mother to the latter’s home when her visit was ended, and thus view
-her ambitious young relative at close range.
-
-This she had done. She had found Beatrice quite up to her expectations.
-She had also met Patsy Carroll and promptly fallen into the toils
-of that most fascinating young person. Patsy had privately advanced
-Beatrice’s cause to so great an extent that it was not long until
-Beatrice was making joyful preparations to accompany Mabel, Eleanor and
-Patsy to Yardley, as a result of her aunt’s generosity.
-
-So it was that the congenial quartette of Wayfarers had settled down
-together at Yardley for a year of conscientious study. It now lacked
-but ten days until the beginning of the Easter vacation and, as usual,
-energetic Patsy was deeply concerned in the problem of how to make the
-best of only two weeks’ recreation when she had fondly looked forward
-to three.
-
-“It wouldn’t do us a bit of good to ask for an extra week,” mourned
-Patsy. “Three girls I know have tried it and been snubbed for their
-pains. What we must do is to get together and plan some sort of outing
-that won’t take us so far away from here. Of course we can’t be sure
-of anything unless Aunt Martha approves. She’ll be disappointed about
-not going to Palm Beach. She just loves to travel around with the
-Wayfarers, only she won’t say so right out. Come on, Bee. Let’s go and
-see the girls. Now that the great secret has all flattened out, like a
-punctured tire on my good old car, I might as well tell Mab and Nellie
-the sad tale.”
-
-“You go, Patsy. I must finish this theme.” Beatrice cast a guilty
-glance at the half-finished work on the table. “I must hand it in at
-first recitation to-morrow and it’s a long way from being finished.”
-
-“Oh, bother your theme! You can finish it later. It’s only eight
-o’clock. We’ll stay just a few minutes.”
-
-“Hello, Perry children!” greeted Patsy, when five minutes afterward she
-and Beatrice broke in upon their chums, who roomed on the floor above
-Patsy and Beatrice.
-
-“Hello, yourself,” amiably responded Mabel, as she ushered them into
-the room. “Of course you can’t read or you would have seen the ‘Busy’
-sign on the door.”
-
-“Pleasure before business,” retorted Patsy. “Kindly ask us to sit down,
-but not on your bed. I want a chair with a back to it. It’s strictly
-necessary to my comfort.”
-
-“Help yourself.”
-
-This from Eleanor who had laid aside her book and come forward.
-
-“What’s on your mind, Patsy?” asked Mabel curiously. “Something’s
-happened. I can tell that by the way you look.”
-
-“I have a heavy load on my mind,” declared Patsy with deep
-impressiveness.
-
-Dramatically striking her forehead, she cried, “Ouch! That hurt!”
-giggled and dropped down into a nearby chair.
-
-“You almost knocked it off,” chuckled Beatrice, seating herself on the
-edge of Mabel’s bed. “The load, I mean.”
-
-“I did not. I almost knocked my forehead off. The load is still there.
-Now to get rid of it.”
-
-Whereupon Patsy plunged into the subject of the great secret.
-
-“And Mother said we could go?” asked Eleanor eagerly when Patsy had
-finished speaking.
-
-“Certainly, but the powers that be, here at Yardley, say you can’t,”
-reminded Patsy. “Palm Beach is not for us this Easter. I’m so disgusted
-over this vacation business!”
-
-“It’s a shame!” exclaimed Mabel. “I don’t want to go any place else.
-Why can’t we go there, anyway? It would take us two or three days to go
-and the same length of time to come back. We’d have a week there. That
-would be better than nothing.”
-
-“I suppose it would,” concurred Patsy rather reluctantly. “It’s only
-that I hate being torn up by the roots and hustled back here just the
-very minute I’m getting used to things at the Beach. There is so much
-to see there. Besides, I’m simply crazy to go to the Everglades. Father
-promised that he’d hire a real Indian guide, to take us there on an
-expedition.”
-
-“Let’s write to our people and tell them to write to the registrar,
-asking if we can’t have that extra week,” proposed Eleanor eagerly. “If
-your Aunt Martha, our mother and Bee’s mother would all write to her,
-it might do some good.”
-
-“We can try it. I doubt whether it will help much,” Patsy said
-gloomily. “Miss Osgood is so awfully strict, you know. It’s our only
-chance and a slim one. I’m going straight to my room and write to Aunt
-Martha. Bee can write to her mother as soon as she finishes a theme
-she’s toiling over. You’d better write to-night, too. The sooner we
-find out the best or the worst, the sooner we’ll knew what to do about
-Easter. If we can only have two weeks, Aunt Martha may want to do the
-Beach anyway. If she doesn’t--well, we’ll have to think up some place
-nearer Yardley to go to. I’m determined to have some kind of trip, if
-it’s only to Old Point Comfort. The Wayfarers have been cooped up all
-winter. It’s time they went wayfaring again.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER II
-
-A HARD-HEARTED REGISTRAR
-
-
-“If I were a registrar, I’d not be so horrid as Miss Osgood,”
-wrathfully exclaimed Patsy Carroll.
-
-Four days had passed since the Wayfarers had despatched their letters
-to their home allies. The quartette were emerging from Yardley Hall as
-Patsy flung forth her disgruntled opinion of Miss Osgood.
-
-They had been summoned to the registrar’s office after classes that
-afternoon, there to be stiffly informed by Miss Osgood that she saw no
-convincing reason for granting them the privilege of an extra week’s
-vacation.
-
-“You wish this extra week merely on account of a pleasure trip you
-have planned,” she had coldly pointed out. “I have been besieged by a
-dozen others with similar requests, none of which I have granted. I
-have replied to the letters which I have received from Miss Carroll,
-Mrs. Forbes and Mrs. Perry, stating that it is impossible to make any
-exception in favor of you girls. I sent for you to come here merely to
-impress upon you that I shall expect you to return to Yardley, from
-your Easter vacation, _on time_. Any delay on your part will constitute
-a direct defiance of my wishes. Kindly remember this and govern
-yourselves accordingly.”
-
-Such was the chilly ultimatum that had aroused Patsy’s ire.
-
-“It’s too mean for anything,” she sputtered, as the four started across
-the campus. “Aunt Martha says in the letter I received from her this
-morning that unless we can have the extra week’s vacation it’s not
-worth while making the trip to Palm Beach. We can’t have it, so that
-settles our grand Florida expedition. If we could go down there in
-summer it wouldn’t matter so much about losing this trip. But we can’t.
-It’s too hot down there in summer time for comfort. We’ll never have a
-chance to go there until we are graduated from college. We’ll be old
-ladies then and have to go around in wheel chairs,” she ended ruefully.
-
-“Oh, that’s only four years off. We may still be able to totter about
-with canes,” giggled Eleanor. “Of course, we’ll have snow-white hair
-and wrinkles, but then, never mind. We can sit and do embroidery or
-tatting and talk of the happy past when we were young and----”
-
-“Stop making fun of me, Nellie,” ordered Patsy severely. Nevertheless
-she echoed Eleanor’s giggle.
-
-“Let’s hustle for the dormitory,” suggested practical Beatrice. “This
-wind is altogether too frisky to suit me. I’ve had to hang onto my hat
-every second since we left the Hall.”
-
-“It’s blowing harder every minute,” panted Mabel, as a fresh gust
-swept whistling across the campus, caught the four girls and roughly
-endeavored to jerk them off their feet.
-
-“It’s going to snow, I guess. It’s too cold for rain,” remarked Patsy,
-squinting up at the sky. “Easter comes awfully early this year, doesn’t
-it? I can’t remember when it’s ever before been in March. That’s
-another reason why it would be fine to spend it at Palm Beach. The
-weather there would be perfect.”
-
-“Oh, well, what’s the use in thinking about it,” said Eleanor. “We
-might as well make the best of things and plan something else.”
-
-“I’m going to write to Auntie the minute I get to my room,” announced
-Patsy, “and ask her where she thinks it would be nice for us to go for
-Easter. I’d like it to be near the ocean, though; Old Point Comfort,
-Cape May, Atlantic City, or some beach resort.”
-
-“I hate to give up the Palm Beach plan. Still, wherever we go, well be
-together,” reminded Mabel. “You can’t down a strong combination like
-the Wayfarers.”
-
-It being but a short walk from Yardley Hall to the large dormitory
-where the students of Yardley lived, the four girls were soon running
-up the broad stone steps, glad to reach shelter from the wind’s
-ungentle tactics.
-
-As a preparatory school, Yardley was famed for its excellence. It
-registered, however, but a limited number of pupils. These lived in one
-large dormitory, there being no campus houses for their accommodation.
-
-Yardley had been at one time a select boarding school for girls. Later
-it had become a preparatory school to college, and had earned the
-reputation of being one of the best of its kind.
-
-As the high school course which the Wayfarers had completed was not
-sufficiently advanced to carry them into college without additional
-preparation, they had, after much discussion, chosen to enter Yardley.
-A year of study there would fit them for entrance into any college
-which they might select as their Alma Mater.
-
-The fact that Yardley occupied a somewhat isolated position of its
-own, the nearest town, Alden, being five miles away, did not trouble
-the Wayfarers. Being true Nature lovers they were never at a loss for
-amusement during their leisure hours. They found far greater pleasure
-in tramping the steep hills which rose behind Yardley than making
-decorous little trips to Alden in Patsy’s car.
-
-Though friendly with their classmates, the Wayfarers nevertheless
-hung together loyally. They were, as Patsy often declared, “a close
-corporation” and quite sufficient unto themselves.
-
-As the little band entered the dormitory that blustering afternoon,
-they were feeling keenly the disappointment so recently meted out to
-them. It was decidedly hard to put away the rosy visions of Palm Beach
-that each girl had conjured up in her own mind.
-
-“Come on up to our room, girls, and we’ll make chocolate,” proposed
-Patsy. “It will probably take away our appetites for dinner, but who
-cares? I don’t believe I’d have much appetite, anyhow. I’m all upset
-about this vacation business.”
-
-Seated about the writing table which Patsy had cleared for the
-occasion, the Wayfarers were presently sipping hot chocolate and
-devouring sweet crackers to the accompaniment of a mournful discussion
-of the situation.
-
-As a result none of them had any enthusiasm for either dinner or
-study that evening. Dinner over they gathered once more in Patsy’s
-room, still too full of their recent disappointment to banish it from
-conversation.
-
-“We can’t make a single plan until we know what Aunt Martha wants to
-do,” asserted Patsy with a sigh. “Oh, I forgot to write to her before
-dinner! I must do it now. Excuse me, Perry children. Bee will amuse
-you. Bee, entertain the young ladies. I’m going to be busy for a little
-while.”
-
-“We must go,” declared Eleanor, rising. “It’s half-past eight. I really
-ought to study a little bit. Mab, you’ve a whole page in Spanish to
-translate. You’d better come along.”
-
-“All right. Just listen to the wind!” Mabel held up her hand. “How it
-shrieks and whistles and wails! The banshees are out, sailing around in
-the air to-night, I imagine.”
-
-“I’m glad we’re not out, sailing around the campus,” commented
-Beatrice. “We’d certainly sail. We couldn’t keep our feet on the
-ground. We’d be blown about like leaves.”
-
-“I think I’d like to go out and fight with the wind,” announced valiant
-Patsy. “As soon as I write my letter I’m going to take it out to the
-mail box.”
-
-“Good-bye, then. I may never see you again,” laughed Eleanor, her hand
-on the door. “You’ll be blown into the next county if you venture out
-to-night.”
-
-“Then I’ll turn around and let the wind blow me back again,” retorted
-Patsy, undismayed by Eleanor’s warning.
-
-The two Perrys having bade their chums good night and departed for
-their own room, Patsy settled down to the writing of her letter. Though
-her fountain pen fled over the paper at rapid speed, it was half-past
-nine when she committed the product of her industry to an envelope.
-
-“There!” she said, as she finished writing the address and affixed a
-stamp. “I’m going to put on my fur coat and go out to the mail box with
-this.”
-
-“Why don’t you mail it in the morning?” Beatrice advised. “I wouldn’t
-go out in that wind if I were you.”
-
-“But you’re not Patsy Carroll,” laughed Patsy. “You’re ever so much
-nicer than she is, but not half so reckless.”
-
-“All right,” smiled Beatrice. “Go ahead and be whisked into the next
-county. I’ll send a search party after you in the morning.”
-
-“Farewell, farewell!” declaimed Patsy, as she dived into a closet for
-her fur coat. “I sha’n’t wear a hat. The wind can’t rip off my auburn
-locks no matter how hard it may try.”
-
-Once out of the dormitory, Patsy had not gone six yards before she
-realized that Eleanor’s prediction was likely to be fulfilled. The
-gale swept her along as if a great hand were at her back, forcing her
-relentlessly forward.
-
-“It’s going to be worse coming back,” she muttered, when at last she
-had reached the mail box and dropped her letter into it. “I’m certainly
-going to have a real fight with this rough old wind.”
-
-Turning, she started defiantly toward the dormitory, forging stolidly
-along in the teeth of the blast.
-
-Crossing the campus diagonally she was over half way to the dormitory
-when of a sudden she cried out in alarm. At the shadowed rear of
-the building she had glimpsed something calculated to inspire fear.
-Rising from the structure was a thick cloud, unmistakably smoke. As
-she hurried on, her heart pounding wildly, she saw that which fully
-confirmed her fears. A long yellow tongue of flame pierced the smoke
-cloud and shot high above it. The dormitory was on fire!
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER III
-
-NO LOSS WITHOUT GAIN
-
-
-The few rods that lay between Patsy and the dormitory seemed miles.
-Flinging open the massive front door at last, she bounded into the
-corridor. To her dismay, no sounds of excited voices or running feet
-were to be heard. She could not even smell smoke.
-
-Stopping only long enough to peer into the big living room which was
-deserted of occupants, she dashed down the long corridor to the heavy
-double doors leading into the dining room. As she swung one of them
-open and darted through, a strong smell of burning wood assailed her
-nostrils.
-
-Instantly she turned and fled back to the corridor. Under the stairs
-hung a large gong. Next second it was clanging out its harsh command to
-fire drill. Like every other modern institution of learning, Yardley
-had its fire drill in which every person in the dormitory was obliged
-to take part.
-
-[Illustration: “We--can’t--go--that--way,” declared the matron in a
-choking voice.]
-
-Patsy’s next act was to dart to the telephone. Though her voice
-quivered with excitement, as she asked Central to turn in the fire
-alarm, her head was clear and her mind in good working order. She hoped
-her classmates would show no signs of panic.
-
-Soon the steady tramp, tramp of feet announced that the fire drill
-was in progress. Down the stairs and into the main corridor filed a
-procession of girls, some fully dressed, others with long coats thrown
-on over half-fitted negligees. Though a buzz of voices filled the air,
-the girls lined up on each side of the corridor in orderly fashion to
-await further developments.
-
-By this time the matron, Mrs. Ainslee, had gained the corridor and had
-promptly taken charge of the situation.
-
-“The back of the dormitory is on fire!” were Patsy’s first words to the
-matron. “I saw it from the campus. I had gone out to mail a letter.
-I rang the gong and turned in an alarm to Central. It’s very serious
-on account of the way the wind’s blowing. If the Alden Hose Company
-doesn’t get here quick the fire will spread so fast that nothing can
-stop it. I think we ought to get together all the buckets we can and
-fight it until the fire engines get here.”
-
-“A good plan,” approved Mrs. Ainslee. “Girls,” she called out in a
-clear, resonant voice, “the rear of the dormitory is on fire. First
-I’m going to call the roll to be sure you are all here. Next I need
-twenty-four girls, eight to each floor, to go after the fire buckets. I
-will ask the first twelve on each side at this end of the lines to go.
-Stop at the second floor bath room and fill up the buckets. We may be
-unable to get to the kitchen faucets. As soon as the buckets are filled
-report here for duty. The rest of you will wait until these girls have
-started upstairs, then file out of the house and onto the lawn.”
-
-Turning to Patsy she said: “Stay here with me, Miss Carroll. I need you
-for another purpose.”
-
-With this she hurried to her office on the same floor, returning with
-her register. The roll called and everyone responding, she directed her
-attention to the bucket brigade. They were soon started in good order
-for the stairs. As soon as the last girl had set foot on the stairs,
-the two lines began to move toward the door. Following, Mrs. Ainslee
-watched them safely outside, then returned to where Patsy stood
-waiting.
-
-“You and I will investigate the fire and see what can be done,” she
-said briefly, and started down the corridor toward the dining room. In
-spite of the heavy doors the smoke had now become noticeable even in
-the corridor. Throwing open one of the double doors, a dense cloud of
-smoke poured over both women, causing them to draw back in a hurry,
-eyes and throats smarting.
-
-“We--can’t--go--that--way,” declared the matron in a choking voice,
-as she swung the door shut. “We’ll have to fight the fire from the
-outside. I’m afraid we can’t do much. It seems to have gained a good
-deal of headway in a very short time. I am going to ask you to stand
-in the corridor, Miss Carroll, while I go outside. As the girls come
-downstairs with the buckets, count them. Send them out doors and to the
-rear of the dormitory. I shall be there to tell them what to do. When
-the last one is safely out, then join me.”
-
-Left briefly to herself, Patsy wondered what her chums thought of her
-in her new position as assistant fire chief. She had seen them in the
-line, but had had no chance to exchange a word with them. She knew
-Beatrice to be one of the bucket brigade, and so waited impatiently
-for her return.
-
-“Oh, Patsy, it’s terrible!” Beatrice called down to her chum, as she
-began the descent of the lower flight of stairs, bucket in hand. “I
-got this bucket at the end of the hall near a window. I looked out
-and saw the back of the dormitory. It’s a mass of flames! Unless the
-fire company comes soon the whole place will go and we’ll lose all our
-clothes and belongings. I managed to snatch my handbag and yours from
-the chiffonier. One of the girls outside is keeping them for me.”
-
-“You dear, thoughtful thing!”
-
-Bee had now reached the foot of the stairs. Setting down the heavy
-bucket, she paused just long enough to return the hug Patsy gave her.
-Then she picked up her bucket and hurried on.
-
-One by one the bucket brigade appeared, only to disappear out the
-front door. Patsy kept careful watch until the twenty-fourth girl had
-vanished. By this time the smoke in the corridor was steadily growing
-more dense. She doubted if the brigade would be able to return for a
-second supply of water. It was high time for her to be moving on, she
-decided.
-
-As she ran down the front steps of the dormitory and around the corner
-of the building toward its rear, she could well understand why the
-corridor had begun to fill with smoke. The rear of the dormitory was
-now wrapped in flames.
-
-Lined up as close to the fiercely blazing structure as they dared
-stand, the members of the brigade were rapidly passing their buckets
-on to half a dozen girls who, under Mrs. Ainslee’s direction, were
-valiantly throwing the contents of the buckets on the flames.
-
-The burning section of the dormitory was much lower than the main part
-of the building, being only two stories high. It might as well have
-been four stories for all the impression that the amateur fire fighters
-could make on the flames. Endeavoring to dash the water upon the
-conflagration from a safe distance, a large portion of it fell on the
-ground.
-
-While they toiled desperately at their hopeless task, the welcome
-clanging of bells and the chug-chug of motors announced the arrival of
-the Alden Hose Company on the scene.
-
-With thankful hearts, the bucket brigade promptly vacated their posts
-to make way for the firemen, who soon had a hose connected with the
-nearest water main and playing vigorously upon the flames.
-
-Despite their gallant efforts, the wind was against them and the
-fire had gained too much headway prior to their arrival to be easily
-quenched.
-
-None of the Yardley girls ever forgot that night. Drawn up in a body
-at one side of the campus they watched in terrified fascination the
-conflict raging between fire and water.
-
-It was between half-past nine and ten o’clock when Patsy discovered the
-fire. It was after one in the morning when water finally reduced the
-fire to a state of inactivity. At least two-thirds of the dormitory had
-been demolished, leaving only the charred rafters. The front part was
-still intact, due to the unceasing toil of the gallant fire fighters.
-They would stick to their posts until there remained no further
-possibility of the fire taking on a new lease of life.
-
-Over in Yardley Hall a weary company of homeless girls were endeavoring
-to make themselves comfortable for the rest of the night. Aside from
-money and small valuables, which the majority had had forethought
-enough to hastily snatch up when the gong had sounded, everything
-belonging to them had gone up in smoke.
-
-The pecuniary side of their losses was not troubling them. There was
-hardly a girl at Yardley who had not come from a home of affluence. The
-discomfort they were temporarily obliged to endure was another matter.
-There was also much wild conjecturing going on among the castaways as
-to what effect the disaster would have upon the school’s routine of
-study.
-
-Lounging wearily on a long oak bench in the corridor, the Wayfarers
-were discussing the situation amid frequent yawns.
-
-“I guess we’ll just have to stay here until morning,” Patsy was
-ruefully informing her chums. “It’s after two now and we’ve no other
-place to go. I’m awfully sleepy, too, but this bench is no place to
-sleep.”
-
-“Some of the girls have stretched out on the benches in the
-class-rooms,” declared Mabel. “We might as well do the same. Where do
-you suppose we’re going to eat breakfast? I’m hungry now.”
-
-“We’re going to eat it in Alden,” announced Patsy positively. “The
-minute daylight comes we’ll hop into my car and drive to the village.
-I’m hungry, too. Wish it was morning now.”
-
-“This is going to make a big difference in our Easter vacation,”
-reflectively remarked Beatrice. “We’ll probably be allowed to go home
-to-morrow. With the dormitory gone there’s no other place for us to
-stay until it’s rebuilt. Of course it will be, and it won’t take very
-long to do it. It isn’t as though it had been burned to the ground. The
-frame work’s there and the front of it is all right.”
-
-“How long do you suppose it will take to rebuild it?” asked Patsy
-eagerly. Bee’s remarks had set her to thinking.
-
-“Oh, five or six weeks,” hazarded Beatrice. “A gang of skilled workmen
-can rebuild it very quickly.”
-
-“Five or six weeks,” mused Patsy.
-
-Of a sudden she straightened up from her lounging attitude, her gray
-eyes very bright.
-
-“Girls,” she said impressively, “do you know what this means to us?
-It means Palm Beach after all. Miss Osgood has been foiled by fire.
-Doesn’t that sound exactly like a movie title? Anyway, there’s no loss
-without some gain. It’s not very pleasant to be driven from home in the
-middle of the night and have all one’s clothes vanish into smoke. I’m
-sorry it happened, of course. But since it _did_ happen, it certainly
-didn’t happen for the worst, so far as the Wayfarers are concerned.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IV
-
-GLORIOUS NEWS
-
-
-Beatrice’s prediction that the night’s disaster would hasten by several
-days the beginning of a prolonged Easter vacation proved accurate. The
-day following the fire was a busy one for all who had suffered from
-the dire calamity. At a meeting held in the chapel at two o’clock on
-the following afternoon, Miss Osgood announced that a six weeks’ leave
-of absence would be granted the pupils of Yardley. Those who were
-sufficiently provided with clothing and funds to go to their homes
-at once were requested to repair to her office immediately after the
-meeting. Those who were not were requested to meet her there at four
-o’clock to discuss ways and means.
-
-As it happened, the Wayfarers were not only ready to go home, but
-wildly impatient to go. Early that morning they had driven to Alden in
-Patsy’s car to purchase the few things needful for the journey. Luckily
-for them they had been fully dressed when the fire alarm had sounded.
-Beatrice, Mabel and Eleanor had wisely donned hats and coats before
-leaving their rooms. Patsy had put on her fur coat when she had gone
-out to mail a letter. She was therefore minus a hat only. An hour’s
-shopping in the village provided the four girls with handkerchiefs,
-gloves and the few other articles which they required.
-
-Four o’clock that afternoon saw them at the railway station at Alden,
-waiting for the four-thirty west-bound train which would land them in
-Morton shortly after ten o’clock that evening. Patsy had already sent
-her aunt a lengthy telegram, informing Miss Carroll of the fire and
-that the four girls would arrive in Morton that night.
-
-Though the journey home was not a long one, it seemed interminable to
-the travelers. Patsy was burning to impart the glorious news to her
-aunt. She was very sure that Aunt Martha would reconsider her decision
-not to go to Palm Beach as soon as she had been informed of the new
-turn in the girls’ affairs.
-
-“Morton at last!” sighed Mabel thankfully, when at five minutes to
-ten that evening the scattered lights of the city’s suburbs began to
-spring up in the darkness. “Our train is exactly on time.”
-
-“I hope Auntie will meet us,” Patsy said. “Maybe your mother will
-be there, too, Perry children; and yours, Bee. I told Auntie in my
-telegram to send them word. I guess they’ll be there, all right enough.”
-
-“It seems queer not to have any luggage, doesn’t it?” remarked Eleanor.
-
-The four girls had now begun putting on their coats, preparatory to
-leaving the train, which was gradually slowing down as it neared the
-station.
-
-“We’re lucky to be here ourselves,” returned Bee seriously. “If that
-fire had started at dead of night it would have been a good deal worse
-for us.”
-
-When the train pulled into the station, however, the Wayfarers were
-doomed to disappointment. No friendly faces greeted their sight as they
-stepped from the train.
-
-“Auntie didn’t get my telegram! I just know she didn’t!” Patsy cried
-out disappointedly. “If she’s read about the fire in the evening
-papers, I can imagine how worried she must be by this time. It’s
-probably the fault of the operator at Alden. He looked like a sleepy
-old stupid. We’d better take a taxi, children. The sooner we get home
-the better it will be for our worried folks.”
-
-Hailing a taxicab the Wayfarers were soon driving through the quiet
-streets of the little city toward the beautiful suburb in which they
-lived. Beatrice was the first to alight in front of the Forbes’
-unpretentious home. Promising to run over to see Patsy the first thing
-the next morning, she said “good night” and hurried up the walk.
-
-“Coming in, girls?” asked Patsy as the taxicab finally stopped in front
-of the high, ornamental iron fence which enclosed the beautiful grounds
-of the Carroll estate.
-
-“Not to-night. We must hustle into our own house and surprise Mother,”
-returned Eleanor.
-
-“Good-night, then. See you in the morning. I’ll pay the driver.”
-
-Patsy hopped nimbly out of the taxicab, handed the driver his fare with
-an additional coin for good measure, then swung open the big gate and
-raced up the driveway to the house.
-
-Three sharp, successive rings of the electric bell had a potent effect
-upon a stately, white-haired matron who sat in the living room, making
-a half-hearted attempt to read. Miss Martha Carroll sprang to her feet
-as the sound fell upon her ears and started for the hall at a most
-undignified pace. There was but one person who rang the Carrolls’ bell
-in that fashion.
-
-Long before the maid had time to reach the door Miss Martha had opened
-it and thrown her arms about the merry-faced, auburn-haired girl on the
-threshold.
-
-“Patsy Carroll, you bad child!” she exclaimed as she gathered her niece
-closer to her. “Why didn’t you telegraph me that you were all right and
-coming home?”
-
-“But I did, Auntie,” protested Patsy, as she energetically hugged her
-relieved relative. “I telegraphed this morning. I knew you hadn’t
-received the telegram the minute I got into the station. In it I asked
-you to meet me.”
-
-“I never received it. Of course it will be delivered _to-morrow_,”
-emphasized Miss Martha disgustedly. “I sent one to you directly after I
-read the account of the fire in the evening paper. My nerves have been
-keyed up to a high pitch, waiting for a reply to it.”
-
-“Poor, dear Auntie,” cooed Patsy. “It’s a shame. Never mind. I’m home
-now, so everything’s lovely again. Let’s go into the living room and
-I’ll tell you all about the fire and how I happened to come home
-to-night. Bee and Mab and Nellie came home with me. They’ll be over to
-see you in the morning.”
-
-“Are you hungry, Patsy?” was her aunt’s solicitous question as the two
-walked slowly into the living room, arms twined about each other’s
-waists.
-
-“No, Auntie. We had dinner on the train. I’m just crazy to talk. I’ve
-some glorious news to tell you. Let’s sit on the davenport and have a
-grand old talking bee.”
-
-“To know you are safe is sufficiently good news,” tenderly rejoiced
-Miss Martha. “Really, Patricia, I am still trembling from the shock I
-received when I opened the newspaper and saw the headline, ‘Fire Sweeps
-Away Dormitory at Yardley.’”
-
-“Well, it didn’t sweep me away,” laughed Patsy, snuggling into the
-circle of her aunt’s arm. The two had now seated themselves on the big
-leather davenport. “Part of the dormitory is still there. We lost all
-our stuff except the clothing we were wearing when the fire broke out.”
-
-“What started it?” questioned Miss Martha rather severely. “The paper
-didn’t state the cause. A dormitory like the one at Yardley ought to
-be fireproof. I am sorry that I did not visit Yardley before allowing
-you to enter the school. I should certainly never countenance your
-living in a place that in any way looked like a fire-trap.”
-
-“The fire started in the basement. The regular janitor was sick and
-a new one took his place. They say it was through his carelessness
-that it started. He was seen to go into the basement smoking a pipe.
-Something he’d been forbidden to do. Of course, no one can be really
-sure that it was his fault, though. I was the one who gave the alarm.”
-
-Patsy went on to recount the incidents of the eventful night.
-
-“Not a single girl acted scared or panicky,” she proudly boasted. “We’d
-had fire drill so often that we knew just what to do when the fire
-really came. But I haven’t told you the glorious news yet. We’re going
-to have _six_ weeks’ vacation. Just think of it, Aunt Martha! Isn’t
-that perfectly gorgeous? Now we can go to Palm Beach, can’t we?”
-
-“So that is the glorious news,” commented Miss Carroll.
-
-For an instant she silently surveyed Patsy, a half-smile touching her
-firm lips.
-
-“What is it, Auntie?”
-
-Patsy was not slow to read peculiar significance in both tone and
-smile. Something unusual was in the wind.
-
-“Would you care very much if we didn’t go to Palm Beach?” was Miss
-Martha’s enigmatic question.
-
-“Of course I should,” Patsy cried out, her bright face clouding over.
-“You’re not going to say that we can’t! You mustn’t! I’ve set my heart
-on the Florida trip. All the way home I’ve been planning for it.”
-
-“I received a letter from your father this morning,” pursued Miss
-Carroll, ignoring Patsy’s protest. “I also received another from Miss
-Osgood in which she refused my request for the extra week of vacation.
-I had written your father several days ago regarding the making of
-arrangements for us to go to Palm Beach. You can read for yourself what
-he has to say.”
-
-Rising, Miss Martha went over to a small mahogany writing desk. Opening
-it she took a letter from one of the pigeon holes.
-
-“Here is Robert’s letter,” she said. Handing it to her niece she
-reseated herself beside the latter.
-
-Very eagerly Patsy took it from its envelope and read:
-
- “DEAR MARTHA:
-
- “Your letter came to me this morning and I would be quick to
- reserve rooms for yourself and the girls at one of the Palm
- Beach hotels, except that I have a better plan. How would you
- like to spend three weeks in a real southern mansion? There is
- such a house on the estate I recently bought.
-
- “It is a curiously beautiful house, built after the Spanish
- style of architecture, with an inner court and many balconies.
- The agent from whom I purchased it informs me that it was
- formerly the property of an elderly Spaniard, Manuel de Fereda.
- After his death, several months ago, the property descended to
- his granddaughter, who was anxious to sell it.
-
- “It is completely furnished, much in the fashion of houses I
- saw when in Mexico. The girls will rave over it and I am very
- anxious that they shall spend their holiday in it. It is not
- many miles from Palm Beach and I have found a good Indian guide
- who will take us on the Everglades expedition which Patsy has
- set her mind on making.
-
- “Of course, if you prefer Palm Beach for the girls, then so
- be it. If you come to Las Golondrinas (The Swallows), that is
- the name of the old house, you will not need to bring so many
- trunks, as you will see very little of society, except when you
- make an occasional trip to the Beach. I can secure a good car
- for your use while here which Patsy can drive to her heart’s
- content.
-
- “Let me know at once what you think of my plan. If you decide
- immediately to take it up, wire me and I will be on the lookout
- for you. I believe you will enjoy this little adventure as much
- as I shall. I know now what Patsy will say. As the girls are
- to have only three weeks’ vacation, better arrange to start as
- soon as possible.
-
- “Affectionately,
-
- “ROBERT.”
-
-“Aunt Martha, the Wayfarers are the luckiest girls in the whole world,”
-was Patsy’s solemn assertion as she looked up from the letter. “First
-they go through a fire and come out as safely as can be. Next they get
-six weeks’ vacation. After that, Daddy plays good fairy, and finds
-them a wonderful palace in the land of flowers. All they have to do
-is to hurry up and take possession. _When_ are we going to start for
-Florida?”
-
-“As soon as we can make ready,” was the prompt reply. “Since your
-father seems very anxious for us to take this trip, I feel that we
-ought not disappoint him. I dare say we may find this old house he
-describes somewhat interesting.”
-
-This calm statement filled Patsy with inward amusement. She knew it to
-be an indirect admission that her aunt was as anxious as she to carry
-out the plan her father had made for them.
-
-“We won’t need a lot of new gowns,” argued Patsy. “We all have evening
-frocks and plenty of wash dresses from last summer. We can wear our
-corduroy suits and high boots to tramp around in. We ought to have some
-of those Palm Beach hats the stores are showing, and new white shoes,
-and a few other things. It isn’t as if we were going to stay at a large
-hotel. We’ll be away from society and living outdoors most of the
-time. This is Friday. I think we ought to start south not later than
-next Wednesday morning. We can’t afford to use up more than one of our
-precious weeks in getting ready and going down to Las--Las----What’s
-the name of our new home?”
-
-Patsy hastily consulted her father’s letter.
-
-“Las Gol-on-drinas,” she pronounced slowly. “I suppose that’s not
-the way to pronounce it. I’ll have to ask Mab about it. She’s taking
-Spanish this year. It’s very necessary to know how to say the name of
-our new southern home,” she added with a chuckle. “Won’t the girls be
-surprised when they hear about this splendid plan of Father’s? Have you
-spoken to Mrs. Perry about it yet, Auntie?”
-
-“No, my dear. You must remember that I received Miss Osgood’s letter,
-refusing my request at the same time that I received your father’s
-letter. They arrived in the first mail this morning. I intended writing
-Robert this evening, explaining that it would be impossible for us
-to go to Florida. Then I read about the fire in the paper and it
-completely upset my nerves. I will call on the Perrys to-morrow morning
-to talk things over. We must also call on Mrs. Forbes.”
-
-“Bee isn’t sure that her mother will let her accept another trip from
-us,” confided Patsy. “That’s the only thing I worried about after I
-knew we were to have the six weeks’ vacation. She said she was sure
-her mother wouldn’t feel right about letting us pay her expenses at a
-fashionable resort like Palm Beach. But it’s all different now. Mrs.
-Forbes can’t very well refuse to let Bee accept an invitation to a
-house party, can she? You must make her see it in that light, Aunt
-Martha, or she won’t let Bee go with us. She’s awfully proud, you know.
-We simply must have Bee along. I wouldn’t care much about the trip if
-she had to stay at home.”
-
-“Beatrice will go with us,” assured Miss Martha in a tone that
-indicated the intention to have her own way in the matter. Patsy knew
-from long experience that her dignified aunt was a person not to be
-easily overruled, and rejoiced accordingly.
-
-“I told Bee that I knew you could fix things beautifully with her
-mother,” she declared happily. “We’re going to have a wonderful time in
-that quaint old house. Wouldn’t it be great if it were haunted, or had
-some kind of a mystery about it? I’ve read lots of queer stories about
-those old southern mansions.”
-
-“Now, Patsy,” Miss Martha made an attempt at looking extremely severe,
-“once and for all you may put such foolish notions out of your head.
-That affair of the missing will at Wilderness Lodge was, of course,
-quite remarkable. Nevertheless, it was very annoying in many respects.”
-
-Miss Martha had not forgotten her enforced hike over hill and dale on
-the memorable afternoon when John, the rascally chauffeur, had set her
-down in an unfamiliar territory and left her to return to the Lodge as
-best she might.
-
-“We are going down South for recreation. Bear that in mind,” she
-continued. “The majority of these tales about haunted houses down there
-originate with the negroes, who are very ignorant and superstitious.
-There is no such thing as a _haunted_ house. I have never yet met a
-person who had actually _seen_ a ghost. Undoubtedly we shall hear a
-number of such silly tales while we are in Florida. I am told that the
-natives are very fond of relating such yarns. You girls may listen to
-them if you like, but you must not take them seriously. You are not apt
-ever again to run into another mystery like that of Wilderness Lodge.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER V
-
-THE LAND OF FLOWERS
-
-
-“No wonder the Spaniards named this beautiful land ‘Florida’!”
-rapturously exclaimed Beatrice Forbes. “I never dreamed it _could_ be
-quite so wonderful as this.”
-
-“I suppose when first they saw it, they must have felt about it as we
-do now,” returned Eleanor. “According to history they landed here on
-Easter Sunday. We’re seeing Florida at about the same time of year as
-they first saw it. It’s almost as wonderful to us as it was to them.
-Not quite, of course, because they underwent all sorts of hardships
-before they landed here. So they must have thought it like Heaven.”
-
-Exactly one week had elapsed since the Wayfarers had arrived in Morton
-with the pleasing prospect ahead of them of a six weeks’ vacation.
-Three days of hurried preparation had followed. Then had come the
-long, rather tiresome railway journey to Florida. They had arrived at
-Palm Beach late in the afternoon of the sixth day, had been met by Mr.
-Carroll and had spent the night at one of Palm Beach’s most fashionable
-hotels.
-
-Weary from the long railway trip, the travelers had resisted the lure
-of a water fête, to be given that evening on Lake Worth, and retired
-early.
-
-“I can secure a boat, if you girls are anxious to take in the fête,”
-Mr. Carroll had informed his flock at dinner that evening. “This fête
-will be nothing very remarkable, however. Later on, I understand, a
-big Venetian fête is to be given. Why not wait and go to that? We can
-easily run up to the Beach in the car from Las Golondrinas. I would
-suggest going to bed in good season to-night. Then we can make an early
-start in the morning for our new home.”
-
-This program being approved by all, the Wayfarers had dutifully settled
-down early for the night. It was now a little after ten o’clock on the
-following morning and the big touring car, driven by Mr. Carroll, was
-bowling due south over a palm-lined country road, toward its objective,
-Las Golondrinas.
-
-It was a particularly balmy morning, even for southern Florida, where
-a perpetual state of fine weather may be expected to hold sway during
-the winter months. Southward under tall palms, past villa after villa,
-embowered in gorgeously colored, flowering vines, the touring car
-glided with its load of enthusiastic beauty-worshippers.
-
-Seated between Miss Martha and Eleanor in the tonneau of the machine,
-Beatrice was perhaps the most ardent worshipper of them all. Love of
-Nature was almost a religion with her. She was a true child of the
-great outdoors.
-
-“It’s so beautiful it makes me feel almost like crying,” she confided
-to her companions as she drew in a deep breath of the exquisitely
-scented morning air. “It’s so different from the Adirondacks. Up there
-I felt exhilarated; as though I’d like to stand up and sing an anthem
-to the mountains. But all this fragrance and color and sunlight and
-warm, sweet air makes me feel--well--sentimental,” finished Bee rather
-timidly.
-
-“It seems more like an enchanted land out of a fairy-tale than a real
-one,” mused Eleanor. “No wonder the birds begin to fly south the minute
-it grows chilly up north. They know what’s waiting for them down here.”
-
-“That’s more than we know,” smiled Beatrice, her brown eyes dreamy.
-“We’re explorers, once more, setting foot in a strange, new country.
-Something perfectly amazing may be waiting for us just around the
-corner.”
-
-“I hope it won’t be a horrid big snake,” shuddered practical Mabel,
-who sat opposite the trio on one of the small seats. “There are plenty
-of poisonous snakes down here, you know. Moccasins and diamond-back
-rattlers, coral snakes and a good many other varieties that aren’t
-poisonous, but horrible, just the same.”
-
-“Why break the spell by mentioning anything so disagreeable as snakes,
-Mab?” asked Eleanor reproachfully. “I’d forgotten that there were such
-hateful, wriggly things. How do you happen to be so well up on the
-snakology of Florida?”
-
-“There’s no such word as snakology,” retorted Mabel. “You mean
-_herpetology_.”
-
-“Snakology’s a fine word, even if old Noah Webster did forget to put it
-in the dictionary,” laughed Eleanor. “Isn’t it, Miss Martha?”
-
-“I can’t say that I specially admire any word pertaining to snakes,”
-dryly answered Miss Carroll. “While we are on the subject, however,
-I may as well say that nothing can induce me to go on any wild
-expeditions into these swamps down here. I daresay these jungles are
-full of poisonous snakes. I greatly doubt the advisability of allowing
-you girls to trail around in such dangerous places.”
-
-“Oh, we’ll be all right with a real Indian guide to show us the way,”
-declared Beatrice confidently. “White Heron is the name of our Indian
-guide. Mr. Carroll was telling me about him last night. He is a
-Seminole and a great hunter.”
-
-“I have no confidence in Indians,” disparaged Miss Martha. “I sincerely
-hope Robert is not mistaken in this one. I shall have to see him for
-myself in order to judge whether he is a fit person to act as guide on
-this foolhardy expedition that Patsy is so set on making.”
-
-This dampening assertion warned the trio of girls that it was high time
-to discuss something else. They remembered Patsy’s difficulties of the
-previous summer in wringing a reluctant permission from Miss Martha to
-go camping in the mountains. Now it seemed she had again posted herself
-on the wrong side of the fence. It therefore behooved them to drop the
-subject where it stood, leaving the winning over of Miss Martha to wily
-Patsy and her father.
-
-Seated beside her father, who, knowing the road to Las Golondrinas,
-was driving the car, Patsy was keeping up a running fire of delighted
-exclamation over the tropical beauty of the country through which they
-were passing.
-
-“I’m so glad you bought this splendid place, Dad,” she rattled along in
-her quick, eager fashion. “After I’m through college maybe we can come
-down to Florida and spend a whole winter.”
-
-“I had that idea in mind when I bought it,” returned her father. “It
-will take considerable time to put Las Golondrinas in good condition
-again. Old Fereda let it run down. There are some fine orange groves on
-the estate, but they need attention. The house is in good condition.
-It’s one of those old-timers and solidly built. The grounds were in bad
-shape, though. I’ve had a gang of darkies working on them ever since
-I bought the place. They’re a lazy lot. Still they’ve done quite a
-little toward getting the lawns smooth again and thinning the trees and
-shrubs.”
-
-“Who was this Manuel de Fereda, anyway?” questioned Patsy curiously. “I
-know he was Spanish and died, and that’s all.”
-
-“I know very little about him, my dear. Mr. Haynes, the agent who sold
-me the property, had never seen him. In fact, had never heard of him
-until Fereda’s granddaughter put the place in his hands for sale. She
-told Haynes that her grandfather was crazy. Haynes said she seemed
-very anxious to get rid of the property and get away from it.”
-
-“There’s just enough about the whole thing to arouse one’s curiosity,”
-sighed Patsy. “I’d love to know more about this queer, crazy old
-Spaniard. Maybe we’ll meet some people living near the estate who will
-be able to tell us more about him.”
-
-“Oh, you’ll probably run across someone who knows the history of the
-Feredas,” lightly assured her father. “Neither the old mammy I engaged
-as cook, nor the two maids can help you out, though. They come from
-Miami and know no one in the vicinity. I’m still hunting for a good,
-trustworthy man for general work. We shall need one while we’re here,
-to run errands, see to the horses and make himself useful.”
-
-“You must have worked awfully hard to get things ready for us, Dad.”
-
-Patsy slipped an affectionately grateful hand into her father’s arm.
-
-“I could have done better if I had known from the start that you were
-really coming,” he returned. “I had to hustle around considerably. At
-least you’re here now and your aunt can be depended upon to do the
-rest. I hope she will get along nicely with her darkie help. They’re
-usually as hard to manage as a lot of unruly children.”
-
-“Oh, she will,” predicted Patsy. “She always makes everybody except
-Patsy do as she says. Patsy likes to have her own way, you know.”
-
-“So I’ve understood,” smiled Mr. Carroll. “Patsy usually gets it, too,
-I’m sorry to say.”
-
-“You’re not a bit sorry and you know it,” flatly contradicted Patsy.
-“You’d hate to have me for a daughter if I were a meek, quiet Patsy who
-never had an opinion of her own.”
-
-“I can’t imagine such a thing,” laughed her father. “I’m so used to
-being bullied by a certain self-willed young person that I rather like
-it.”
-
-“You’re a dear,” gaily approved Patsy. “I don’t ever really bully you,
-you know. I just tell you what you have to do and then you go and do
-it. That’s not bullying, is it?”
-
-“Not in our family,” satirically assured Mr. Carroll.
-
-Whereupon they both laughed.
-
-Meanwhile, as they continued to talk in the half-jesting, intimate
-fashion of two persons who thoroughly understand each other, the
-big black car ate up the miles that lay between Palm Beach and Las
-Golondrinas. As the party drew nearer their destination the highly
-ornamental villas which had lined both sides of the road began to grow
-fewer and farther apart. They saw less of color and riotous bloom and
-more of the vivid but monotonous green of the tropics.
-
-They turned at last from the main highway and due east into a white
-sandy road which ran through a natural park of stately green pines.
-Under the shadow of the pines the car continued for a mile or so, then
-broke out into the open and the sunlight again.
-
-“Oh, look!”
-
-Half rising in the seat, Patsy pointed. Ahead of them and dazzlingly
-blue in the morning sunshine lay the sea.
-
-“How near is our new home to the ocean, Dad?” she asked eagerly.
-
-“There it is yonder.”
-
-Taking a hand briefly from the wheel, Mr. Carroll indicated a point
-some distance ahead and to the right where the red-tiled roof of a
-house showed in patches among the wealth of surrounding greenery.
-
-“Why, it’s only a little way from the sea!” Patsy cried out. “Not more
-than half a mile, I should judge.”
-
-“About three quarters,” corrected her father. “The bathing beach is
-excellent and there’s an old boathouse, too.”
-
-“Are there any boats?” was the quick question.
-
-“A couple of dinghys. Both leaky. I gave them to one of my black
-fellows. Old Fereda was evidently not a sea dog. The boathouse was full
-of odds and ends of rubbish. I had it cleared up and repainted inside
-and out. It will make you a good bath house. It’s a trim looking little
-shack now.”
-
-Presently rounding a curve in the white, ribbon-like road, the
-travelers found themselves again riding southward. To their left,
-picturesque masses of jungle sloped down to the ocean below.
-
-Soon to their right, however, a high iron fence appeared, running
-parallel with the road. It formed the eastern boundary of Las
-Golondrinas. Behind it lay the estate itself, stretching levelly toward
-the red-roofed house in the distance. Long neglected by its former
-owner, the once carefully kept lawns and hedges had put forth rank,
-jungle-like growth. Broad-fronded palms and palmettos drooped graceful
-leaves over seemingly impenetrable thickets of tangled green. Bush and
-hedge, once carefully pruned, now flung forth riotous untamed masses
-of gorgeous bloom.
-
-“It looks more like a wilderness than a private estate,” was Patsy’s
-opinion as her quick eyes roved from point to point in passing.
-
-“It looked a good deal more like a jungle a few weeks ago,” returned
-Mr. Carroll. “Wait until you pass the gates; then you’ll begin to
-notice a difference. The improvements my black boys have made don’t
-show from the road.”
-
-For a distance of half a mile, the car continued on the sandy highway.
-At last Mr. Carroll brought it to a stop before the tall, wrought-iron
-gates of the main entrance to the estate. Springing from the
-automobile, he went forward to open them.
-
-“Every man his own gate-opener,” he called out jovially. “Drive ahead,
-Patsy girl.”
-
-Patsy had already slipped into the driver’s seat, hands on the wheel.
-Immediately her father called out, she drove the machine slowly forward
-and through the now wide-open gateway.
-
-“Do let me drive the rest of the way, Dad,” she implored as Mr. Carroll
-regained the car.
-
-“All right. Follow this trail wherever it goes and you’ll finally bring
-up at the house,” was the good-humored injunction.
-
-By “trail” Mr. Carroll meant the drive, which, flanked by hedges of
-perfumed oleander, wound through the grounds, describing a sweeping
-curve as it approached the quaint, grayish-white building that had for
-generations sheltered the Feredas. A little beyond the house and to its
-rear, they glimpsed rank upon rank of orange trees, on which golden
-fruit and creamy blossoms hung together amongst the glossy green of
-foliage.
-
-A light land breeze, freighted with the fragrance of many flowers, blew
-softly upon the Wayfarers. Its scented sweetness filled them with fresh
-delight and appreciation of their new home.
-
-Patsy brought the car to a stop on the drive, directly in front of
-an arched doorway, situated at the center of the facade. Before the
-travelers had time to step out of the automobile the massive double
-doors were swung open by a stout, turbaned mammy, the true southern
-type of negro, fast vanishing from the latter day, modernized South.
-Her fat, black face radiant with good will, she showed two rows of
-strong white teeth in a broad smile. Beside her stood two young colored
-girls who stared rather shyly at the newcomers.
-
-“I done see yoh comin’, Massa Carroll!” she exclaimed. “I see yoh way
-down de road. So I done tell Celia an’ Em’ly here, y’all come along
-now, right smart, an’ show Massa Carroll’s folks yoh got some manners.’”
-
-“Thank you, Mammy Luce,” gallantly responded Mr. Carroll, his blue eyes
-twinkling with amusement. Whereupon he gravely presented the gratified
-old servant to his “folks.” A courtesy which she acknowledged with an
-even greater display of teeth and many bobbing bows.
-
-Headed by Mr. Carroll, the travelers stepped over the threshold of Las
-Golondrinas and into the coolness of a short stone passageway which
-ended in the patio or square stone court, common to houses of Spanish
-architecture.
-
-In the center of the court a fountain sent up graceful sprays of water,
-which fell sparkling into the ancient stone bowl built to receive the
-silvery deluge. Above the court on three sides ranged the inevitable
-balconies. Looking far upward one glimpsed, through the square opening,
-a patch of blue sunlit sky.
-
-“Welcome to Las Golondrinas, girls! It’s rather different from anything
-you’ve ever seen before, now isn’t it?”
-
-Mr. Carroll addressed the question to his flock in general, who
-had stopped in the center of the court to take stock of their new
-environment.
-
-“It’s positively romantic!” declared Patsy fervently. “I feel as
-though I’d stepped into the middle of an old Spanish tale. I’m sure
-Las Golondrinas must have a wonderful history of its own. When you
-stop to remember how many different Feredas have lived here, you can’t
-help feeling that a lot of interesting, perhaps tragic things may have
-happened to them. I only wish I knew more about them.”
-
-“Let the poor dead and gone Feredas rest in peace, Patsy,” laughingly
-admonished Eleanor. “We came down here to enjoy ourselves, not to dig
-up the tragic history of a lot of Spanish Dons and Donnas.”
-
-“A very sensible remark, Eleanor,” broke in Miss Martha emphatically.
-“There is no reason that I can see why you, Patsy, should immediately
-jump to the conclusion that this old house has a tragic history. It’s
-pure nonsense, and I don’t approve of your filling your head with such
-ideas. I dare say the history of these Feredas contains nothing either
-startling or tragic. Don’t let such ridiculous notions influence you
-to spend what ought to be a pleasant period of relaxation in trying to
-conjure up a mystery that never existed.”
-
-“Now, Auntie, you know perfectly well that if we happened to stumble
-upon something simply amazing in this curious old house, you’d be just
-as excited over it as any of us,” gaily declared Patsy.
-
-“‘Sufficient unto the day is the evil thereof,’” loftily quoted Miss
-Martha, refusing to commit herself. “It will take something very
-amazing indeed to impress me.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VI
-
-THE BEGINNING OF ADVENTURE
-
-
-“The time has come, O Wayfarers, to think of many things,” gaily
-declaimed Patsy, bursting into the somber, high-ceilinged, dark-paneled
-sitting-room where Miss Martha, Beatrice, Mabel and Eleanor sat around
-a massive mahogany table, busily engaged in writing letters.
-
-“Go away, Patsy,” laughingly admonished Mabel, pen suspended in mid-air
-over her note paper. “You’re a disturber. You’ve made me forget what I
-was going to write next. If you won’t be a letter-writer, don’t be a
-nuisance.”
-
-“I can’t be what I never have been and could never possibly become,”
-retorted Patsy. “I’ll promise to keep quiet, though, if you’ll all
-hustle and finish your letters. I’m dying to go over to the orange
-groves and it’s no fun going alone. Any old person will do for
-company.”
-
-“Then we _won’t_ do,” emphasized Beatrice. “We are very distinguished
-persons who don’t belong in the ‘any old’ class.”
-
-“Glad you told me,” chuckled Patsy. “I’ll give you ten minutes to
-wind up your letters. If you’re not done then--well--I’ll give you
-ten more. I am always considerate. I’m going to leave you now, but I
-shall return. I’ll come buzzing around again, like a pestiferous fly,
-in exactly ten minutes by my wrist watch. I’m only going as far as the
-gallery to pay my respects to the dead and gone Feredas.”
-
-With this announcement Patsy turned and strolled from the room. The
-gallery to which she referred was in the nature of a short corridor,
-extending between the second-floor sitting-room and ending at the
-corridor on which were situated sleeping rooms which the Wayfarers
-occupied. It had evidently served as a picture gallery for several
-generations of Feredas. Its walls were lined with a heterogeneous
-collection of oil paintings, largely landscape and studies in still
-life. At least half of one side of it, however, was devoted strictly to
-portraits. It was before this particular section that Patsy halted.
-
-Two days had elapsed since the Wayfarers had made port at Las
-Golondrinas. On the evening of their arrival, a storm had come up,
-bursting over the old house in all its tropical fury. Following it,
-rain had set in and for two days had continued to fall in a steady,
-discouraging downpour that made out-door excursions impossible for the
-time being.
-
-Now, on the third morning since their arrival, the sun again shone
-gloriously, in skies of cerulean blue, and the air was heavy with the
-sweetness of rain-washed blossoms. It was an ideal morning to spend out
-of doors, and Patsy was impatient to start on an exploring tour of the
-estate.
-
-During the two days in which the Wayfarers had been kept indoors by
-the rain, they had become thoroughly acquainted with the old house.
-They had wandered about it from cellar to roof, marveling at its utter
-unlikeness to any other house in which they had ever set foot. Its
-somber, spacious rooms with their highly polished floors and queer,
-elaborately carved, foreign-looking furniture of a by-gone period,
-evoked volleys of wondering comment and speculation. The cool patio
-with its silver-spraying fountain, the long windows opening out onto
-picturesque balconies and the dim stone corridors, all held for them
-the very acme of romance. It was like being set down in a world which
-they had known only in fiction.
-
-Each girl had found some one particular object on which to fix
-her special admiration. Eleanor went into ecstasies over a huge,
-carved-leather chest that stood in the sitting-room. Beatrice was
-enthusiastic over a heavy mahogany book-case filled with old Spanish
-volumes, bound in boards and parchment. She loudly deplored her
-inability to read Spanish and announced her intention of tackling the
-fascinating volumes with the aid of a Spanish-English dictionary which
-Mabel had brought along. Mabel was vastly impressed by a high, frowning
-old desk with many drawers and pigeon-holes. She was perfectly sure,
-she declared, that it must contain a secret drawer, and in consequence
-spent the great part of an afternoon in an unavailing hunt for it.
-
-Patsy found unending delight in the portrait section of the picture
-gallery. The dark-eyed, tight-lipped men and women who stared down at
-her from the wall filled her with an intense curiosity regarding who
-they were and how long it had been since they had lived and played
-their parts in the history of the Feredas.
-
-Undoubtedly they were all Feredas. Of unmistakably Spanish cast of
-countenance, they bore a decided family resemblance to one another.
-The difference in the style of dress worn by the pictured folk
-proclaimed them to be of many generations. How far removed from the
-present day, she did not know. She was of the opinion that some of them
-must have lived at least two hundred years ago. She was very sure that
-one portrait, that of a man, must have been painted even earlier than
-that.
-
-It was this portrait in particular which most fascinated her. Hung in
-the center of the section and framed in tarnished gilt, it depicted the
-full length figure of a Spanish cavalier. Patsy thought he might easily
-have been one of the intrepid, Latin adventurers who accompanied Ponce
-de Leon on his unsuccessful quest into Florida for the fabled Fountain
-of Youth.
-
-As a gallant of long ago, the man in the picture instantly arrested her
-attention. The thin, sinister face above the high Spanish ruff repelled
-her, however. The bright, bird-like eyes, the long, aquiline nose and
-the narrow lips, touched with a mocking smile, combined to make a
-countenance of such intense cruelty as filled her with a curious sense
-of terror. It was as if the sharp, black eyes followed her, as she
-moved along from picture to picture. There was a peculiar, life-like
-quality about the painting which gave her the uncomfortable feeling
-that the sinister cavalier might step down from the canvas at any
-moment.
-
-Nevertheless she could not refrain from stopping to look at him every
-time she passed through the corridor. She was convinced that he must
-have been the first Fereda who landed in the New World and that he
-had a record which might well match his malevolently smiling face. It
-piqued her not a little to reflect, that, who he was and what he had
-been would in all probability ever remain a mystery to her.
-
-Strolling into the corridor that morning to study again the provoking
-object of her curiosity, Patsy wondered how the granddaughter of old
-Manuel de Fereda could ever have been content to turn over the contents
-of Las Golondrinas to strangers. She wondered what had become of her.
-She was undoubtedly the only one who knew the identity of the painted
-cavalier. Patsy decided that she would ask her father to write Mr.
-Haynes, the agent, from whom he had purchased the property, asking him
-for Eulalie Fereda’s address. Once she had obtained it, Patsy fully
-intended to write to the Spanish girl for information concerning the
-painted cavalier.
-
-Wrapped in meditation, she did not hear Beatrice’s light approaching
-footsteps until her friend had traversed half of the corridor.
-
-“Oh, Bee!” she hailed, as the latter paused beside her. “I’m going to
-try to get Eulalie Fereda’s address from Mr. Haynes, and then write her
-about this picture. It seems queer that she allowed all these portraits
-of her family to be sold with the house, now doesn’t it? I certainly
-shouldn’t care to see the pictures of my respected ancestors pass into
-the hands of strangers.”
-
-“Perhaps she’d lived here so long with her grandfather that she’d grown
-tired of him and all the rest of the Fereda tribe,” hazarded Bee.
-“Imagine how lonely it would be for a young girl in this gloomy old
-house. It _is_ gloomy, you know. We don’t mind it because there are a
-crowd of us. It all seems just quaint and romantic to us.”
-
-“All except Auntie,” reminded Patsy, smiling. “She says that the whole
-house ought to be done over from top to bottom and that she intends to
-come down here next fall and see to it herself. I think she only half
-means it, though. She likes it the way it is, just as much as we do,
-but she won’t admit it. Aunt Martha has a real love for the romantic,
-but she tries hard not to let any one know it.”
-
-“The furniture in this house must be really valuable,” Bee said
-seriously. “Most of it is antique. Goodness knows how old that desk in
-the sitting-room is; and that carved-leather chest and the book-case.
-Why, those books alone must be worth a good deal. A book collector
-would rave over them. I wish I knew something about rare volumes and
-first editions. If I were your father I’d send for an expert and have
-the collection valued.”
-
-“I’ll tell him about it,” nodded Patsy. “Only he won’t bother to do
-it while we’re here. He’s more interested in having the grounds put
-in order than anything else. He says the orange groves are not worth
-much because they’ve been neglected for so long. With care, he thinks
-they’ll do better next year. We’ve come down here too late for the real
-fruit season, you know. We should have been here in January or February
-for that. Anyway, he didn’t buy this place as a money-making venture.
-He thought it would be a nice winter home for us.”
-
-“I’m lucky to have the chance to see it,” congratulated Beatrice. “If
-ever I become a writer, I shall put Las Golondrinas into a story.
-That’s a pretty name; Las Golondrinas.”
-
-“Isn’t it, though. I suppose it was named on account of the tree
-swallows,” mused Patsy. “Dad says there are flocks of them here. They
-have blue backs and white breasts. I’m sure I saw some this morning.
-Oh, dear! I wish the girls would hurry. I want to start out and see the
-sights. Come on. Let’s remind them that time is flying.”
-
-Catching Bee by the hand, Patsy pulled her, a willing captive, toward
-the sitting-room.
-
-“Time’s up and more than up!” she announced, poking her auburn head
-into the big room.
-
-“I’m ready,” responded Eleanor, rising from her chair.
-
-“So am I--in another minute.”
-
-Hastily addressing an envelope to her mother, Mabel tucked her letter
-into it, sealed and stamped it.
-
-“There!” she ejaculated as she laid it on the little pile of letters
-which represented the fruits of the morning’s labor. “That’s off my
-mind.”
-
-“What about you, Auntie?” questioned Patsy, noting that her dignified
-relative was still engaged in letter-writing. “Don’t you want to join
-the explorers?”
-
-“You girls can get along very well without me,” placidly returned Miss
-Carroll. “I am not through with my writing. Besides, I don’t feel
-inclined to go exploring this morning. I warn all of you to be careful
-where you set foot. This old place may be infested with snakes.”
-
-“Oh, we’ll be careful. We’ll each carry a good stout stick,” assured
-Beatrice. “That’s the way tourists do in the tropics, you know. On some
-of the South Sea Islands, I’ve read that tourists always carry what
-they call ‘snake sticks’ when they go calling. At night the coolies go
-ahead of a calling party and beat the long grass aside.”
-
-“Very fine, Bee. I hereby appoint you chief grass-beater of the realm,”
-teased Mabel.
-
-“I decline the high office,” retorted Bee. “Every Wayfarer will have
-to do her own bit of trail beating. As I am _very_ brave, I don’t mind
-walking ahead, though.”
-
-“I will walk with you, Bee,” graciously offered Patsy. “Woe be to the
-wriggly, jiggly sarpint that crosses our path.”
-
-In this light strain the four girls left Miss Martha to her writing
-and sallied forth from the coolness of the old house into the bright
-sunlight.
-
-“Where shall we go first?” queried Patsy, as they paused on the drive
-in front of the house. “Shall we get acquainted with our numerous acres
-of front yard, or shall we make a bee-line for the orange groves?”
-
-“Let’s do the groves first,” suggested Eleanor. “I’m awfully anxious to
-get close to real orange trees with real oranges growing on them.”
-
-“Come on, then.”
-
-Seizing Beatrice by the arm, Patsy piloted her around a corner of the
-house, Mabel and Eleanor following.
-
-Crossing a comparatively smooth bit of lawn, at the rear of the house,
-the Wayfarers halted by common consent before proceeding further.
-Between them and the orange groves lay a wide stretch of ground, fairly
-overrun with tangled bush and vine. Magnificent live oak, cedar and
-palmetto trees, spread their noble branches over thickets of bright
-bloom and living green. It was extremely picturesque, but “very snaky,”
-as Mabel declared with a little shudder.
-
-“There’s a darkie over yonder, clipping away that thicket!” Eleanor
-pointed to where an ancient, bare-footed, overalled African, wearing
-a huge, tattered straw hat, was industriously cutting away at a thick
-patch of sprawling green growth.
-
-“Hey, there, Uncle!” called out undignified Patsy. “Come here a minute,
-please.”
-
-The old man straightened up at the hail and looked rather blankly about
-him. Catching sight of the group of white-clad girls, he ambled slowly
-toward them through the long grass.
-
-“Mornin’, young ladies,” he saluted, pulling off his ragged headgear
-and disclosing a thick crop of snow-white wool. “Ah reckin mebbe yoh
-wants Uncle Jemmy t’ tell yoh suthin’?”
-
-“Yes, we do, Uncle,” beamed Patsy. “We wish you’d show us a path to
-the orange groves, if there is one. We’d like to have some good, stout
-sticks, too, in case we see any snakes. Aren’t you afraid to walk
-around in that jungle in your bare feet?”
-
-“Laws, Missie, I’se used toh it, I is. Th’ ain’t no snaikes round heah
-what mounts toh much. I done see a big black snaike this mohnin’, but
-that fella ain’t out toh do me no damage. He am a useful snaike, he am.”
-
-“We’ll be just as well satisfied not to meet his snakeship, even if he
-is so useful,” muttered Eleanor in Patsy’s ear.
-
-“Ef yoh all young ladies’ll come along now, I’se gwine toh show yoh the
-way toh git toh the orange groves,” continued Uncle Jemmy. “There am a
-path ovah heah.”
-
-So saying, the old man took the lead and trotted along the clipped
-lawn where it skirted the high grass for a distance of perhaps twenty
-yards. The girls followed him, single file, every pair of bright eyes
-intent on trying to catch a glimpse of the path.
-
-Pausing at last, Uncle Jemmy proceeded to lop off several low-growing
-branches from a nearby tree. These he deftly stripped clear of twigs
-and foliage and, trimming them smooth with a huge, sharp-bladed pocket
-knife, presented one to each of the four explorers.
-
-“Heah am yoh snaike sticks, young ladies,” he declared, showing a vast
-expanse of white teeth in a genial grin. “Now I’se gwine to take yoh a
-little furder an’ yoh’ll see de path.”
-
-A few steps and they came abreast of a giant oak tree and here the path
-began, a narrow trail, but beaten hard by the passing of countless feet.
-
-“Yoh jes’ follow de path whereber he goes and yoh-all gwine come af’er
-while toh de groves,” he directed.
-
-“Thank you, Uncle Jemmy.” Patsy nodded radiant thanks. Seized by a
-sudden thought she asked: “Do you live around here?”
-
-“No, Missie. I comes from Tampa, I does. Soon’s I git through this job
-foh Massa Carroll I gwine toh git right back toh Tampa again. It am de
-bes’ place fo’ Uncle Jemmy.”
-
-“Oh!” Patsy’s face fell. Then she tried again. “Do any of these boys
-working with you live around here?”
-
-“No, Missie. They done come from Miami. We am all strangahs heah.”
-
-“I see. Thank you ever so much for helping us.”
-
-With a kindly nod to the old man, Patsy turned to her chums who had
-stood listening in silence to the questions she had asked.
-
-“Are you ready for the great adventure?” she queried. “Come along,
-then. One, two, three and away we go, Indian fashion!”
-
-Bidding a smiling good-bye to Uncle Jemmy, who had now turned to go,
-the three girls filed into the trail behind their energetic leader. And
-thus the Wayfarers started off on what really was the beginning of a
-greater adventure than they dreamed.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VII
-
-THE COTTAGE IN THE PALM GROVE
-
-
-Greatly to their relief, the Wayfarers were not called upon to do
-battle with their stout snake sticks. For a quarter of a mile they
-followed the narrow path. It wound in and out of the tall, coarse grass
-and around wide-spreading trees and ragged clumps of bushes. At length
-they reached the point for which they had been aiming.
-
-“It’s simply splendiferous!” exclaimed Eleanor, as the quartette halted
-well inside the first grove to breathe in the fragrance of orange
-blossoms and feast their eyes on the beauty of the tropical scene
-spread out before them.
-
-“Why, it isn’t just an orange grove!” Beatrice cried out. “Look, girls!
-There are _lemons_ on that tree over yonder!”
-
-“Yes, and see the tangerines!” Patsy pointed out. “Those stiff, funny
-bushes there have kumquats on them. And I do believe--yes, sir--that
-ragged old tree there is a banana tree. This is what I call a mixed-up
-old grove. I supposed oranges grew in one grove and lemons in another,
-etc., etc.”
-
-“I guess we don’t know very much about it,” laughed Eleanor. “We’ll
-have to get busy and learn what’s what and why. Let’s walk on through
-this grove and see what’s in the next one. There seems to be a pretty
-good path down through it.”
-
-Amid many admiring exclamations, the Wayfarers strolled on, seeing
-new wonders with every step they took. The brown, woody litter which
-covered the ground under the trees was plentifully starred with the
-white of fallen blossoms. To quote Mabel, “Why, we’re actually walking
-on flowers!”
-
-Late in the season as it was they found considerable fruit growing
-within easy reach of their hands. Eager to avail themselves of the
-pleasure of “actually picking oranges from the trees,” the girls
-gathered a modest quantity of oranges and tangerines.
-
-Warned by Mr. Carroll always to be on the watch for spiders, scorpions
-and wood-ticks before sitting down on the ground, Beatrice and Patsy
-energetically swept a place clear with a huge fallen palmetto leaf, and
-the four seated themselves on the dry, clean-swept space to enjoy their
-spoils.
-
-All of them had yet to become adepts in the art of out-door orange
-eating as it is done in Florida. In consequence, they had a very
-delightful but exceedingly messy feast. Picking oranges at random also
-resulted in their finding some of the fruit sour enough to set their
-teeth on edge. These they promptly flung from them and went on to
-others more palatable.
-
-“No more oranges for me this morning,” finally declared Eleanor,
-pitching the half-eaten one in her hand across the grove. “I’m soaked
-in juice from head to foot. Look at my skirt.”
-
-“I’ve had enough.” Bee sprang to her feet, drying her hands on her
-handkerchief. “We ought to pick a few oranges to take to Miss Martha.”
-
-“Let’s get them when we come back,” proposed Patsy. “What’s the use in
-lugging them around with us. I want to walk all the way through these
-groves to the end of the estate. Dad says it’s not more than a mile
-from the house to the west end of Las Golondrinas.”
-
-“All right. Lead on, my dear Miss Carroll,” agreed Bee with a low bow.
-“Be sure you know where you’re going, though.”
-
-“I know just as much about where I’m going as you do,” merrily flung
-back Patsy over her shoulder.
-
-Headed by their intrepid leader, the little procession once more took
-the trail, wandering happily along under the scented sweetness of the
-orange trees. Overhead, bright-plumaged birds flew about among the
-gently stirring foliage. Huge golden and black butterflies fluttered
-past them. Among the white and gold of blossom, bees hummed a deep,
-steady song as they pursued their endless task of honey-gathering.
-
-On and on they went, passing through one grove after another until they
-glimpsed ahead the high, wrought-iron fence which shut in the estate on
-all four sides. Reaching it, they could look through to a small grassy
-open space beyond. Behind it rose a natural grove of tall palms. Set
-down fairly in the middle of the grove was a squat, weather-stained
-cottage of grayish stone.
-
-“Oh, see that funny little house!” was Mabel’s interested exclamation.
-“I wonder whom it belongs to!”
-
-“Let’s go over and pay it a visit,” instantly proposed Patsy. “Perhaps
-someone lives there who can tell us about old Manuel Fereda and
-Eulalie, his granddaughter. It doesn’t look as though darkies lived
-there. Their houses are mostly tumble-down wooden shacks. Still it may
-be deserted. Anyway, we might as well go over and take a look at it.”
-
-“How are we going to get out of here?” asked Eleanor. “I don’t see a
-gate.”
-
-“There must be one somewhere along the west end,” declared Bee. “Let’s
-start here and follow the fence. Maybe we’ll come to one.”
-
-“We’d better walk north through the grove then. There’s no path close
-to the fence and that grass is too high and jungly looking to suit me,”
-demurred Eleanor.
-
-Traveling northward through the grove, their eyes fixed on the fence in
-the hope of spying a gate, the explorers walked some distance, but saw
-no sign of one. Finally retracing their steps to their starting point,
-they headed south and eventually discovered, not a gate, but a gap in
-the fence where the lower part of several iron palings had been broken
-away, leaving an aperture large enough for a man to crawl through.
-
-“This means us,” called Patsy and ran toward it.
-
-Energetically beating down the grass under it with the stick she
-carried, she stooped and scrambled through to the other side, emitting
-a little whoop of triumph as she stood erect.
-
-One by one her three companions followed suit until the four girls were
-standing on the grassy clearing, which, a few rods farther on, merged
-levelly into the grove of palms surrounding the low stone cottage.
-
-From the point at which they now halted they could obtain only a side
-view of it among the trees.
-
-“Judging from the big cobweb on one of those windows, I should say no
-one lives there,” commented Eleanor.
-
-“It _does_ look deserted. Let’s go around to the front of it. Then we
-can tell more about it,” suggested Patsy.
-
-Crossing the grassy space, the quartette entered the shady grove. A few
-steps brought them abreast of the front of the cottage.
-
-“The door’s wide open! I wonder----”
-
-Patsy broke off abruptly, her gray eyes focussing themselves upon
-the open doorway. In it had suddenly appeared a woman, so tall that
-her head missed but a little of touching the top of the rather low
-aperture. For an instant she stood there, motionless, staring or rather
-glaring at her uninvited visitors out of a pair of wild black eyes.
-The Wayfarers were staring equally hard at her, fascinated by this
-strange apparition.
-
-What they saw was a fierce, swarthy countenance, broad and deeply
-lined. The woman’s massive head was crowned by a mop of snow-white hair
-that stood out in a brush above her terrifying features. A beak-like
-nose, a mouth that was merely a hard line set above a long, pointed
-chin, gave her the exact look of the proverbial old witch. Over the
-shoulders of a shapeless, grayish dress, which fell in straight
-ugly folds to her feet, she wore a bright scarlet shawl. It merely
-accentuated the witch-like effect.
-
-In sinister silence she took the one stone step to the ground and began
-to move slowly forward toward the group of girls, a deep scowl drawing
-her bushy white brows together until they met.
-
-“She’s crazy!” came from Mabel, in a terrified whisper. “Let’s run.”
-
-“I will _not_,” muttered Patsy. “I’m going to speak to her.”
-
-Stepping boldly forward to meet the advancing figure, Patsy smiled
-winningly, and said: “Good-morning.”
-
-“What you want?” demanded a harsh voice.
-
-Ignoring Patsy’s polite salutation, the fearsome old woman continued
-to advance, halting within four or five feet of the group of girls.
-
-“Oh, we were just taking a walk,” Patsy brightly assured. “We saw this
-cottage and thought we’d like to see who lived here. We----”
-
-“Where you live?” sharply cut in the woman.
-
-“We are staying at Las Golondrinas. My father owns the property now.
-I am Patricia Carroll and these three girls are my chums,” amiably
-explained Patsy. “We are anxious to find someone who can tell us
-something about the Feredas. We are looking for----”
-
-“You will never find!” was the shrieking interruption. “It is not for
-you, white-faced thieves! _Madre de Dios!_ Old Camillo has hidden it
-too well. Away with you! Go, and return no more!”
-
-This tempestuous invitation to begone was accompanied by a wild waving
-of the woman’s long arms. The gold hoop rings in her ears shook and
-swayed as she wagged a menacing head at the intruders.
-
-“Just a minute and we will go.”
-
-Undismayed by the unexpected burst of fury on the part of the
-disagreeable old woman, Patsy stood her ground unflinchingly. There was
-an angry sparkle in her gray eyes, however, and her voice quivered
-with resentment as she continued hotly:
-
-“I want you distinctly to understand that we are _not_ thieves, even
-though we happen to be trespassers. When we saw this cottage we thought
-it might belong to some one who had lived here a long time and had been
-well acquainted with Manuel Fereda and his granddaughter, Eulalie----”
-
-“Eulalie! Ah-h! _Ingrata!_ May she never rest! May the spirit of old
-Camillo give her no peace!”
-
-Here the strange, fierce old creature broke into a torrent of Spanish,
-her voice gathering shrillness with every word. She appeared to have
-forgotten the presence of the Wayfarers and directed her tirade at the
-absent Eulalie, who was evidently very much in her bad graces.
-
-“Come on. Let her rave. She surely is crazy. She may try to hurt us,”
-murmured Eleanor in Patsy’s ear.
-
-“All right. Come on, girls.”
-
-Tucking her arm in Eleanor’s, Patsy turned abruptly away from the
-ancient belligerent who was still waving her arms and sputtering
-unintelligibly.
-
-Without a word the quartette hurried out of the palm grove, across the
-grassy space and made safe port on their own territory, through the gap
-in the fence. This accomplished, curiosity impelled each girl to peer
-through the palings for a last glimpse at the tempestuous cottager.
-
-She had not been too busy anathematizing the unlucky Eulalie to be
-unaware of the hasty retreat of her unwelcome visitors. She had now
-stopped flapping her arms and was bending far forward, her fierce old
-eyes directed to where the Wayfarers had taken prudent refuge. Noting
-that they were watching her, she shook a fist savagely at them, threw
-up both arms menacingly as though imploring some unseen force to visit
-vengeance upon them, and bolted for the cottage.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VIII
-
-PATSY SCENTS A MYSTERY
-
-
-“Now _who_ do you suppose _she_ is?” broke from Bee, as the old woman
-disappeared.
-
-“Ask me something easier,” shrugged Patsy. “She’s a regular old witch,
-isn’t she? Dad must know who she is. Funny he never said anything about
-her to us. Suppose we trot back to the house and watch for him. He
-promised, you know, at breakfast, to be back from Palm Beach in time
-for luncheon so as to take us down to the boathouse this afternoon.
-He had a business appointment with a man at the Beach. That’s why he
-hurried away so fast this morning.”
-
-Suiting the action to the word, the Wayfarers started back through the
-orange groves, discussing with animation the little adventure with
-which they had recently met.
-
-“That woman was Spanish, of course,” declared Beatrice. “Could you
-understand her, Mab, when she trailed off into Spanish, all of a
-sudden? She said ‘ingrata.’ I caught that much. What does it mean?”
-
-“It means ‘the ungrateful one,’” Mabel answered. “I couldn’t understand
-much of what she said. I caught the words, ‘Camillo, Manuel, Eulalie,’
-and something about a spirit torturing somebody--Eulalie, I suppose she
-meant. ‘Madre de Dios’ means ‘Mother of God,’ or ‘Holy Mother.’ It’s a
-very common form of expression among the Mexicans. I believe this woman
-is a Mexican.”
-
-“We know who Eulalie is. By Manuel she must have meant the Manuel
-Fereda who died just a little while ago,” said Bee reflectively. “But
-who in the world is or was old Camillo? And what did he hide? What made
-her call us ‘white-faced thieves’? What is it that we’ll never find?
-Will somebody please answer these simple questions?”
-
-“Answer them yourself,” challenged Patsy gaily. “We’ll be delighted to
-have you do it. You know you are fond of puzzling things out.”
-
-“It sounds--well----” Bee laughed, hesitated, then added: “Mysterious.”
-
-“Exactly,” warmly concurred Patsy. “We’ve actually stumbled upon
-something mysterious the very first thing. I knew, all the time, that
-we were going to find something queer about this old place.”
-
-“I don’t think there’s anything very mysterious about a tousle-headed
-old crazy woman,” sniffed Mabel. “She certainly didn’t act like a sane
-person. Maybe she had delusions or something of the sort.”
-
-“Perhaps _her_ name is Camillo,” suggested Bee, her mind still occupied
-with trying to figure out to whom the name belonged.
-
-“No.” Mabel shook her head. “Camillo is a _man’s_ name, not a woman’s.
-She might have meant her husband or her brother. Goodness knows whom
-she meant. I tell you, she’s a lunatic and that’s all there is to it.
-If we hadn’t been armed with four big sticks she might have laid hands
-on us.”
-
-“Well, Uncle Jemmy’s snake sticks were some protection, anyhow,”
-laughed Eleanor. “I’m going to keep mine and lug it around with me
-wherever I go. I may----”
-
-A wild shriek from Mabel left the sentence unfinished. Walking a pace
-or two ahead of the others, Mabel had almost stumbled upon a huge
-black snake, coiled in a sunny spot between the trees. Quite as much
-startled as she, the big, harmless reptile uncoiled his shining black
-folds in a hurry and slid for cover.
-
-“Oh!” she gasped. “Did you _see_ him? He was a whopper! And I almost
-stepped on him! He might have bitten me.”
-
-“Black snakes don’t bite, you goose,” reassured intrepid Patsy. “He was
-probably more scared at the yell you gave than you were to see him. He
-must be the same one Uncle Jemmy saw this morning.”
-
-“Maybe he’s been raised a pet,” giggled Eleanor. “We may get to know
-him well enough to speak to when we fall over him coiled up on various
-parts of the estate. If you ever get really well acquainted with him,
-Mab, you can apologize to him for yelling in his ears.”
-
-“First find his ears,” jeered Mabel, who had sufficiently recovered
-from the scare to retaliate.
-
-“Our second adventure,” commented Beatrice. “Wonder what the next will
-be.”
-
-“Nothing more weird or exciting than luncheon, I guess,” said Patsy.
-“There! We forgot to pick those oranges we were going to take to
-Auntie.”
-
-“Let’s go back and get them,” proposed Eleanor.
-
-“Oh, never mind. I dare say there are plenty of oranges at the house,”
-returned Patsy. “Auntie won’t mind. We’ll go down to the grove
-to-morrow and pick a whole basketful for her.”
-
-By this time the Wayfarers were nearing the house. Rounding a corner
-of the building they spied Mr. Carroll some distance down the drive.
-He was sitting in his car engaged in conversation with a white man who
-stood beside it. Both men were too far away from the girls for them to
-be able to make out plainly the stranger’s features. They could tell
-little about him save that he was tall, slim, dark and roughly dressed.
-
-“That must be the new man,” instantly surmised Patsy.
-
-Pausing, she shaded her eyes with one hand, to shut out the glaring
-sunlight, and stared curiously at the stranger.
-
-“Can’t tell much about him,” she remarked. “There; he’s started down
-the drive. Now we’ll find out from Dad who he is.”
-
-The stranger, having turned away, Mr. Carroll had started the car and
-was coming slowly up the drive. Sighting the group of white-clad girls
-he waved to them.
-
-“Hello, children!” he saluted, as he stopped the car within a few feet
-of them. “Where have you been spending the morning? Want to ride up to
-the house?”
-
-“No, thank you,” was the answering chorus, as the girls gathered about
-the automobile.
-
-“We’ve been exploring, Dad,” informed Patsy. “Is that the new man? I
-mean the one you were just talking to.”
-
-“Yes. I met him at the gate. He had been up to the house looking for
-me. His name is Crespo; Carlos Crespo. He’s a Mexican. He tells me he
-used to work for old Fereda. That he was practically brought up on the
-estate.”
-
-“Then he’s the very man we want!” exclaimed Beatrice eagerly. “He’ll be
-able to tell us about the Feredas.”
-
-“I doubt your getting much information from him,” returned Mr. Carroll.
-“He seems to be a taciturn fellow. To tell you the truth, I wasn’t very
-favorably impressed by him. He acted sulky, it seemed to me. I’m going
-to give him a trial, because it’s so hard to get a white man for the
-job. I can’t afford to let this one slip without giving him a chance.
-If I find him balky, and ungracious to your aunt and you girls, I’ll
-let him go. He says he knows nothing about automobiles, but a great
-deal about horses.”
-
-“Oh, well, we don’t want him as chauffeur, anyway,” declared Patsy.
-“You and I can do all the driving. He’ll be handy when we go on our
-trip into the jungle. He can attend to the horses. Very likely, when he
-gets used to us, he’ll be fairly amiable. He can’t be any more snippy
-and disobliging than John was last summer while we were at Wilderness
-Lodge. He was positively _hateful_ to us. Of course, that was all on
-account of his loyalty to that horrid Rupert Grandin. If this Carlos
-man proves honest and dependable, we sha’n’t mind if he sulks at first.
-He’ll probably get over it as he comes to know us better. We had an
-adventure this morning, Dad.”
-
-Patsy straightway left the subject of the new man and plunged into a
-colorful account of their meeting with the strange old woman.
-
-“Do you know who she is, Mr. Carroll? Did you ever see her?” questioned
-Mabel eagerly.
-
-“No.” Mr. Carroll shook his head. “She must be the woman one of my
-colored boys was trying to tell me about the other day. He described
-the cottage you’ve just mentioned and said a ‘voodoo’ woman lived there
-who was ‘a heap sight crazy.’ He claimed he saw her out in her yard
-late one night ‘making spells.’ I didn’t pay much attention to him, for
-these darkies are full of superstitions and weird yarns.”
-
-“We’ll ask Carlos about her,” decided Patsy. “That makes two things
-we’re going to quiz him about; the ‘voodoo’ lady and the Feredas. When
-is he to begin working for you, Dad?”
-
-“He’ll be back this afternoon. I’m going to set him to work at clearing
-up the stable. It’s a regular rubbish shack. I’ll give him a gang of
-black boys to help him. I’m anxious to have it put in trim as soon as
-possible. To-morrow I must go over to the stock farm and see about
-getting some horses for our use while here. I’ll take Carlos with me
-and then we’ll see how much he knows about horses.”
-
-“We’d better be moving along. We promised Miss Martha to be back in
-plenty of time for luncheon,” reminded Mabel.
-
-“I’ll see you girls at the house,” Mr. Carroll said. “I’m going to
-take the car to the garage. We’ll hardly need it this afternoon. The
-Wayfarers are such famous hikers, they’ll scorn riding to the beach,”
-he slyly added.
-
-“Of course we are famous hikers. Certainly we intend to walk to the
-beach,” sturdily concurred Patsy.
-
-“Scatter then, and give me the road,” playfully ordered her father.
-
-Moving briskly out of the way of the big machine, the chums followed
-it up the drive at a leisurely pace.
-
-“Well have to change our gowns before luncheon.”
-
-Eleanor ruefully inspected her crumpled white linen skirt, plentifully
-stained with orange juice.
-
-The others agreeing, they quickened their pace and reaching the house
-hurriedly ascended to their rooms to make the desired change. As usual
-Mabel and Eleanor were rooming together. Patsy and Bee shared a large
-airy room next to that occupied by the two Perry girls. Miss Martha
-roomed in lonely state in a huge, high-ceilinged chamber across the
-corridor from the rooms of her flock.
-
-“I don’t care whether or not this Carlos man acts sulky,” confided
-Patsy to Bee when the two girls were by themselves in their own room.
-“I’m going to beam on him like a real Cheshire cat. He’ll be so
-impressed by my vast amiability that he’ll be telling me all about the
-Feredas before you can say Jack Robinson. I’m awfully interested in
-this queer family and I simply must satisfy my curiosity. Do you really
-believe, Bee, that there _is_ a mystery about them?”
-
-“I don’t know whether there’s any mystery about the Feredas
-themselves,” Bee said slowly. “That old woman may or may not be crazy.
-I was watching her closely all the time we stood there. At first she
-was just suspicious of us as being strangers. It was your saying that
-we were living at Las Golondrinas and that your father owned the
-property that made her so furious. She had some strong reason of her
-own for being so upset at hearing that.”
-
-“Maybe she used to be a servant in the Fereda family and on that
-account can’t bear to see strangers living here in their place,” Patsy
-hazarded.
-
-“I thought of that, too. It would account for her tirade against
-Eulalie. I believe there’s more to it than that, though, else why
-should she call us thieves and go on as she did?”
-
-Bee reflectively repeated the question she had earlier propounded.
-
-“That’s precisely what we are going to find out,” Patsy said with
-determination.
-
-“But you know what your aunt said,” Bee dubiously reminded.
-
-“Don’t you worry about Auntie,” smiled Patsy. “When we tell her at
-luncheon about our adventure she’ll probably say we had no business
-to trespass. You let me do the talking. I sha’n’t mention the word
-‘mystery.’ I’ll just innocently ask her what she thinks the old witch
-woman could have meant. She’ll be interested, even if she pretends that
-she isn’t. Last summer, at Wilderness Lodge, she was as anxious as we
-for the missing will to be found. If there is truly a mystery about
-Las Golondrinas, Aunt Martha will soon be on the trail of it with the
-Wayfarers. Take my word for it.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IX
-
-THE WOOD NYMPH
-
-
-Invited by guileful Patsy at luncheon that day to advance an opinion
-regarding the “witch woman” of the morning’s adventure, Miss Martha
-said precisely what her niece had prophesied she would say. She added
-something, however, which Patsy had not anticipated.
-
-“You girls should have known better than trespass on private property,”
-she rebuked. “As for that woman, I should say she was mentally
-unbalanced. Don’t any of you go near that cottage again. I will not
-have you risking your lives in the vicinity of a lunatic. You had best
-make inquiry about her, Robert,” she continued, turning to her brother.
-
-“I intend to,” was the reply. “This new man, Crespo, may know her
-history. Very likely she is one of those queer but harmless characters
-that one happens on occasionally down here. I hardly think there is
-any cause for alarm, Martha. Still, it will be just as well for the
-girls to steer clear of her.”
-
-“I know I don’t want to go near her again,” Mabel said with a slight
-shudder. “She was positively savage.”
-
-“One call is enough for me, thank you,” smiled Eleanor.
-
-Patsy and Beatrice exchanged significant glances but said nothing.
-Each knew the other’s thought. Both had a valiant hankering to try
-their luck at a second interview with the witch woman. Unfortunately
-for them, Miss Martha’s stern mandate forbade further venturesome
-investigation.
-
-Patsy’s carefully prepared question concerning the strange old woman
-Miss Martha replied to with a touch of impatience:
-
-“My dear child, you can hardly expect me to be able to find meaning in
-the ravings of a lunatic. I have only one thing to say on the subject.
-I have said it before and I repeat it. You are all to keep away from
-that cottage.”
-
-This emphatic repetition put a quietus to Patsy’s hopes of awakening
-her aunt’s interest in what she and Bee had already decided was a real
-mystery. Miss Martha’s one thought on the subject seemed to be that
-the society of an insane woman should be shunned rather than courted.
-
-“My little scheme turned out all wrong,” Patsy admitted ruefully to
-Beatrice, as the two strolled into the patio after luncheon and seated
-themselves on the edge of the fountain’s time-worn stone basin. “I
-wanted to go to that cottage again, too.”
-
-“So did I,” confessed Bee. “I was sure your aunt would say we mustn’t.”
-
-“I’m going to make Dad take us there some day,” planned resourceful
-Patsy. “He’ll be willing to, I know. Then Auntie can’t say a word.”
-
-“Hey, there!” suddenly called a gay voice from the balcony.
-
-Both Bee and Patsy cast a quick glance upward to see Mabel leaning over
-the balcony rail.
-
-“Are we going to the beach, or not?” she inquired. “If we are, you’d
-better leave off languishing beside the fountain and hurry up. We ought
-to start before sunset, you know,” she added satirically.
-
-“It’s only one-thirty by my little watch,” calmly informed Patsy. “It’s
-a long time yet until sunset, Mabsie. Didn’t you know that?”
-
-“What about taking our bathing suits?” demanded Mabel, ignoring Patsy’s
-playful thrust.
-
-“Just as you like. If you and Nellie want to go bathing, then so do we.”
-
-“I’d rather not,” returned Mabel. “I’d rather just poke around down on
-the beach and in the boat house. I think it would be more fun to get up
-early to-morrow morning and go bathing.”
-
-“Those are golden words, my child,” grinned Patsy. “I was of the same
-mind, but too polite to say so. We can prowl around the boat house
-this afternoon and find out what we need to take down there in the
-way of bathing comforts. Dad says we’ll have to add the final touches
-ourselves. We’ll be up in a minute, Mabsie.”
-
-“All right.”
-
-Mabel promptly disappeared from the balcony. Patsy and Bee rose.
-Leaving the patio they went upstairs to their room.
-
-A few minutes later the Wayfarers and Mr. Carroll were swinging down
-the oleander drive toward the highway. Miss Martha had declined to
-join the expedition. Following the highway north for about an eighth
-of a mile, they turned at last into a narrow white road hedged in by
-vermilion hibiscus growing rank and wild for lack of care. The road
-was shaded for some distance by double rows of palms, which had been
-planted on each side. Presently it entered the stretch of jungle lying
-above the beach and continued almost straight ahead through the bit of
-wilderness.
-
-“Some of the Feredas must have liked to go bathing or they never would
-have had this dandy road cut through to the beach,” was Beatrice’s
-opinion, as the party came at last to the end of the tropical road and
-out onto the warm white sands.
-
-The beach itself curved inward like a new moon to meet the jungle which
-surrounded it on three sides. At the left, near the water’s edge, stood
-the once dilapidated boat house. It now looked very trim in its new
-coat of white paint.
-
-The jungle road ended almost at the middle of the new moon. Emerging
-from it and walking a few steps across the sands, the Wayfarers paused,
-by common consent, to gaze admiringly out on the glorious expanse of
-dazzlingly blue sea that lay only the breadth of the curving beach
-beyond them.
-
-“This is the nicest bathing beach I ever saw!” exclaimed Patsy. “The
-beauty of it is that it’s our very own. We’re sole proprietors of this
-bit of sand and sea.”
-
-“It’s the first one _I_ ever saw,” laughed Bee. “You must remember
-that I never saw the Atlantic Ocean until I came down here. It seems
-thrilling to be so near to it.”
-
-“Wait until to-morrow morning and I’ll give you a good salt-water
-ducking,” promised Patsy. “Won’t that be nice and thrilling?”
-
-“Try it if you dare,” challenged Bee, “and see who gets the ducking.”
-
-“I’m sorry now that we didn’t bring our bathing suits along,” lamented
-Eleanor. “I’d love to have a swim in that nice blue water. It looks
-fairly shallow, too.”
-
-“At most of these lonely beaches along the coast, I imagine the water
-must be too deep for safety. This place looks safe enough,” agreed
-Mabel enthusiastically.
-
-“We can’t tell much about it until we try it out for ourselves,”
-returned Patsy. “Sometimes shallows stop all of a sudden and you get
-into very deep water before you know it. I found that out once when we
-were spending the summer at Wildwood. Our cottage was quite a way up
-the beach. I started to wade into the surf one morning, and all at once
-I felt myself going down, down, down. I had sense enough to strike out
-and swim, or I wouldn’t be here now.”
-
-“I don’t believe the water is very deep here.”
-
-Mr. Carroll now broke into the conversation. He had been silently
-listening to his charges, an amused smile touching his firm lips.
-
-“You mustn’t venture too far out, though,” he cautioned. “Remember,
-there are no guards about to keep tabs on you. Besides, the mists down
-here often creep up very suddenly over the sea. If you happened to
-venture too far out and were caught in one, your chance of regaining
-the shore would be slim. I can’t always be depended upon to be on hand
-to look out for you, so you’ll have to be good children and not run any
-needless risks.”
-
-“We’ll be as good as gold and as careful as can be,” lightly promised
-Patsy. “Now take us over to the boat house. We’d like to see how it
-looks inside.”
-
-Conducted by Mr. Carroll to the trim little house, the Wayfarers
-found it as completely renovated inside as out. Mr. Carroll had gone
-to considerable pains to transform the former boat house into a
-comfortable bath house. Wooden benches had been built along two sides
-of it. Plenty of towel racks and hooks on which to hang clothing were
-in evidence. A good-sized mirror had been hung on one of the end walls.
-There was also a tall rack designed to hold wet bathing suits and
-numerous other minor details had been added in the way of conveniences
-for bathers.
-
-“Why, it’s all ready for us!” exulted Patsy. “You’ve thought of almost
-everything we’d need, Dad. You’re a dear.”
-
-“I had it fixed up as nearly like the one we had at Wildwood as I could
-recall,” returned her father. “You girls will have to add the finishing
-touches. Sorry there isn’t a shower bath. I intend to put one in later
-when I have time to see to the piping for it.”
-
-“Oh, we can get along beautifully without it,” Patsy assured. “It’s
-ever so much nicer than I thought it would be. You’ve done wonders to
-get it ready for us on such short notice.”
-
-The other three girls were quick to concur with Patsy in this opinion.
-
-“Here’s the key.” Mr. Carroll handed it to his daughter. “I now declare
-you Chief Custodian of the Bath!”
-
-“I accept the high office. May I be ever faithful to my trust,”
-declaimed Patsy merrily as she took the proffered key, a small brass
-affair on a ring.
-
-“The first thing we ought to do is to sit down and make a list of the
-things we will have to bring from the house,” suggested practical
-Beatrice. “I brought along a little memorandum pad and a pencil.”
-
-Extracting them from the breast pocket of her white middy blouse, Bee
-offered them to Patsy.
-
-“You may do the writing, Bee.” Patsy declined the proffered pad
-and pencil. “I’ll tell you what we’ll have to have. Any valuable
-suggestions from the illustrious Perry sisters will be respectfully
-received.”
-
-“While this important consultation is in full swing, I believe I’ll
-take a walk up the beach,” announced Mr. Carroll. “My black boys tell
-me there’s an old fisherman living not far above here who owns several
-boats. I’m anxious to get in touch with him and, if possible, arrange a
-fishing trip for us while we’re here.”
-
-“Go ahead, Dad. You have my permission,” saucily replied Patsy. “After
-we’ve made our list, we’ll lock up the bath house and play around on
-the beach until you come back.”
-
-The list having been finally completed, to the Wayfarers’ mutual
-satisfaction, the quartette left the bath house. Up and down the white
-stretch of beach they strolled for a little, enjoying the fresh sea
-breeze. Finally they seated themselves on the warm sands to talk and
-watch the incoming tide, interestedly trying to calculate how long it
-would be before they would have to move further back to escape its slow
-but steady advance.
-
-“It’s coming nearer and nearer,” remarked Bee, as she fascinatedly
-watched the endless succession of waves break on the sand, each a
-trifle higher up the beach than the preceding one.
-
-“I move that we move.”
-
-Eleanor rose, shaking the sand from her white linen skirt. Patsy and
-Beatrice also got to their feet.
-
-“I hate to move. I’m so comfy.”
-
-Stretched at full length in the sand, Mabel made no attempt to follow
-her companions’ example.
-
-“Stay where you are then and get your feet wet,” laughed Eleanor.
-“There’s a good-sized wave heading straight for you now.”
-
-This information caused Mabel hastily to draw up her feet. Next moment
-she was standing erect beside Eleanor.
-
-“Dad ought to be back before long.”
-
-Patsy stood gazing up the beach in the direction Mr. Carroll had taken.
-
-“Oh, look!”
-
-The sudden ringing cry issued from Beatrice’s lips. Her back to the
-sea, she had been dreamily staring into the green depths of the jungle.
-Now she was pointing excitedly toward a tangled thicket of briar
-bushes and flowering vines.
-
-“Where? I don’t see anything! What is it, Bee?” instantly went up from
-Mabel.
-
-“She’s gone.” Bee’s arm dropped to her side. “We scared her away. She
-ducked and ran.”
-
-“Who ducked and ran? What are you talking about, Bee?”
-
-It was Patsy who now impatiently put these questions.
-
-“A wood nymph,” smiled Beatrice. “I was looking at that thicket up
-there and all of a sudden I saw her. She stood between two bushes
-watching us. Such a pretty little thing, with big black eyes and long
-black hair hanging about her face. I had just caught a glimpse of her
-when I called out to you. The minute she knew I’d seen her she turned
-and ran off through the green. I saw her black head bobbing in and out
-among the bushes; then I lost sight of her.”
-
-“You certainly saw more than we did,” Patsy said ruefully. “I didn’t
-see anyone. Was she--well--a white person, Bee?”
-
-“Oh, yes. As white as you or I, and about as tall as Mab, I think,”
-replied Beatrice. “She had a beautiful little face. She was wearing a
-faded brown dress or apron. I couldn’t tell which. It startled me to
-see her there, all of a sudden. She looked so wild and shy and pretty.
-Exactly like a wood nymph. I couldn’t help calling out.”
-
-“Too bad we missed seeing her,” deplored Eleanor. “Maybe we’ll run
-across her some other day. She must live in this vicinity or she
-wouldn’t have been roaming around in the jungle. She certainly can’t be
-afraid of snakes. I wouldn’t care to go dashing recklessly through that
-wilderness.”
-
-“That’s only because you’re not used to the idea,” declared Patsy. “By
-the time we’ve been here a couple of weeks, we’ll probably go tramping
-around in that bit of jungle without being in the least afraid of
-snakes.”
-
-“Never,” was Mabel’s discouraging ultimatum.
-
-The appearance of Mr. Carroll some distance up the beach diverted the
-minds of the quartette from the shy little apparition Beatrice had
-seen. With one accord the four set off on the run to meet him.
-
-Nor had the Wayfarers the remotest idea that, from a concealing
-thicket of living green, a few yards above the spot where they had
-been standing, a pair of bright, black eyes wistfully and wonderingly
-watched them as they scampered across the sands toward Mr. Carroll.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER X
-
-GETTING ACQUAINTED WITH OLD OCEAN
-
-
-“Isn’t there a road to this beach wide enough for the automobile to run
-on?” Miss Martha inquired of her brother at breakfast the next morning,
-in a tone of long-suffering patience.
-
-“None that I know of,” was the discouraging reply. “That stretch of
-jungle above the beach extends for miles along the coast. The only road
-to the sea in this vicinity is the one cut through the woods by old
-Fereda. It’s hardly more than a path. Too bad you don’t ride, Martha.
-You could make it easily on horseback.”
-
-“Never,” was the firm assertion. “I wouldn’t trust myself to the best
-behaved horse that ever lived. I suppose I shall have to resign myself
-to walking.”
-
-“You needn’t go with us, if you’d rather not, Auntie,” broke in Patsy.
-“Dad says it’s perfectly safe for us to go alone. We’re on our own
-property all the way to the beach, you know.”
-
-“That is not the point,” calmly disagreed Miss Carroll. “I feel it my
-duty to accompany you whenever your father is unable to do so. I dare
-say the sea breeze will benefit me. I merely dislike the idea of this
-tramp through the brush and weeds.”
-
-“Oh, the road’s as smooth as can be,” hastily assured Beatrice. “It’s
-only narrow, that’s all. It’s really a beautiful walk, Miss Martha. I
-am sure you will like it.”
-
-“I doubt it,” was the pessimistic response. “Nevertheless I shall go.”
-
-Half an hour after breakfast a luggage-laden procession set off
-beachwards. Miss Martha brought up the rear with Mabel, eye-glasses
-firmly astride her nose, a book in one hand, her white parasol held
-over her head at a dignified angle. Beatrice and Eleanor walked just
-ahead, while Patsy buoyantly led the van, calling continually back over
-her shoulder to her companions with every fresh feature of interest her
-bright eyes picked up along the way.
-
-“I must say the walking is better than I had expected to find it,” was
-Miss Carroll’s grudging opinion as the party at length emerged from
-the woods onto the sands. “Walking, as an exercise, has never appealed
-to me, however.”
-
-“If you walk down to the beach and back with us every day, Auntie,
-you’ll soon become a champion walker,” Patsy said lightly.
-
-“I have no such ambition,” was her aunt’s dry answer. “Further, I don’t
-intend to come down here every day. On occasions when Robert is busy,
-and I do not feel inclined to take this walk, you will have to forego
-sea-bathing.”
-
-“Come on over and see the bath house, Auntie.”
-
-Patsy slipped an arm through that of her apparently disobliging
-relative. She was well aware of the fact that her aunt’s bark was worse
-than her bite.
-
-Escorted by Patsy to the little bath house, Miss Martha critically
-inspected its interior and set upon it her seal of placid approval.
-For a half hour the four girls busied themselves with unpacking and
-arranging the various articles they had brought with them as final
-furnishing touches. This done to their mutual satisfaction, they
-gleefully began preparations for their swim. In an incredibly short
-time they had donned their bathing suits and were ready for their
-morning dip.
-
-“My first appearance as a deep sea swimmer,” proudly announced Bee,
-making a low bow to Patsy.
-
-“You look sweet, Bee. That dark red suit is awfully becoming,” praised
-Eleanor. “Pull your cap down well over your head. Salt water makes
-one’s hair so horrid and sticky.”
-
-“Come on! The water’s fine! Hurrah for old Ocean!”
-
-Patsy held out an inviting hand to Beatrice. Attired in a sleeveless
-suit of white flannel, with pale blue trimmings, one auburn curl
-escaping from under her white rubber cap, her gray eyes dancing, cheeks
-pink with excitement, Patsy was the embodiment of girlish prettiness
-and radiant health.
-
-The Wayfarers made a charming picture as they caught hands and ran
-down the beach and into the water four abreast. There was a pleasant
-light in Miss Martha’s blue eyes as she stood watching them and heard
-the concerted shout of glee that arose as they struck the water and
-Patsy immediately proceeded to administer the ducking she had promised
-Beatrice.
-
-Being a very sturdy young person, Bee had a will of her own. In
-consequence a battle royal ensued in the water, punctuated by shouts of
-laughter. It ended by both combatants losing their footing and sitting
-down violently in the water, to the great joy of Mabel and Eleanor,
-who seized the opportunity to fall upon Patsy and Bee and duck them
-thoroughly on their own account. Whereupon a good-natured, free-for-all
-combat waged.
-
-Their first exuberance subsiding the bathers settled themselves to
-enjoy their swim in the buoyant salt water. Accustomed from childhood
-to sea-bathing, Patsy was an expert swimmer. Bee, who had learned to
-swim in fresh water, did fairly well, however. Mabel and Eleanor were
-indifferent swimmers. To quote Mabel: “We can swim and that’s about
-all.”
-
-Having watched her flock make a noisy acquaintance with old Ocean, Miss
-Martha retired to a spot on the sands shaded by the overhanging palms
-where beach and jungle met. Seating herself on the clean, warm sand,
-she opened the novel she had brought with her and devoted herself to
-its pages.
-
-Oblivious for the time being to the merry voices of her charges, she
-was finally startled by a piercing shriek of pain. As a result of going
-bathing bare-footed, one Wayfarer, at least, had met with disaster.
-Eleanor had had the misfortune to run afoul of a most ungracious crab,
-which had promptly shown displeasure of the intrusion by taking hold
-and pinching.
-
-By the time Miss Martha had dropped parasol and book to rush to the
-water’s edge, Eleanor had won free of her tormentor and was limping for
-land.
-
-“What’s the matter, Eleanor?” Miss Carroll cried out concernedly.
-
-“A horrid crab pinched my foot,” was the doleful response. “I thought
-it would never let go. I was wading near the shore and stepped on it.
-My, but my foot hurts!”
-
-Emerging from the shallows, Eleanor dropped down on the sand and began
-tenderly nursing her injured foot.
-
-“You should have worn bathing slippers and stockings,” was the doubtful
-consolation. “They not only look well but are also a protection.”
-
-“But this is a private beach and it’s ever so much more fun not to wear
-them, Miss Martha. I’m not really hurt much. My foot feels all right
-now,” Eleanor hastily assured. “It hardly pains me at all.”
-
-“Oh, I sha’n’t insist on your wearing them,” Miss Martha smiled grimly
-at Eleanor’s miraculous recovery. “I merely expressed my opinion.”
-
-By this time, Mabel, who had been some distance away from her sister
-when the latter cried out, now appeared beside her.
-
-“What happened to you, Nellie?” she asked. “I heard you yell and came
-as fast as I could.”
-
-“Oh, a hateful old crab pinched my foot. It wasn’t anything. I was
-silly to make a fuss about it. I frightened Miss Martha and I’ve
-spoiled Bee’s and Patsy’s sport. They’d started to race as far as that
-upper curve of the beach. Now they’re coming back.”
-
-“It’s just as well.” Miss Martha consulted her wrist watch. “You girls
-have been in the water over an hour. That is long enough for your first
-day’s bathing.”
-
-Patsy and Bee presently arriving on the scene with solicitous
-inquiries, they were promptly informed of Eleanor’s mishap by the
-sufferer herself.
-
-“Poor ’ittle Nellie! Did a nasty, naughty old crab nip her
-tootsey-ootsey?” deplored Patsy. “Show Patsy that wicked crabby an’
-her’ll kill him wight down dead.”
-
-“Oh, stop, you goose,” giggled Eleanor. “You make me feel as though I
-were about three years old.”
-
-“That’s the way she appreciates my sympathy,” grinned Patsy. “Never
-mind, Nellie. I forgive you, even if you did interrupt the grand race.
-Bee was gaining on me, anyway. She might possibly have beaten me. Want
-to try it over again, Bee?”
-
-“Not to-day, Patsy,” objected her aunt. “You’ve been in the water long
-enough. By the time you girls are ready to go back to the house it will
-be nearly noon. I ordered luncheon at one o’clock, as usual. It will be
-one before we reach the house.”
-
-“All right, Auntie. We’ll postpone the great race until to-morrow.”
-
-As she spoke, Patsy began energetically to wring the salt water from
-the skirt of her bathing suit, preparatory to retiring into the bath
-house.
-
-Her companions following Patsy’s example, Miss Carroll strolled back
-to the spot where she had left book and parasol. The white parasol
-lay precisely where she had cast it aside in her hurried dash to
-Eleanor’s rescue. The book----Miss Martha stared down at the sand in
-sheer amazement. The red, cloth-bound volume she had been reading had
-disappeared as utterly as though the earth had suddenly opened and
-swallowed it.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XI
-
-A TIMID CALLER
-
-
-“My book! Where is it?”
-
-Miss Martha continued to stare severely at the spot where her book had
-so lately lain.
-
-“I saw you sitting there reading it,” affirmed Eleanor positively. “I
-remember looking up toward you just before that cranky old crab nipped
-my foot.”
-
-“Certainly I was reading it. I laid it down beside my parasol. It never
-walked away by itself. Someone stole it. This is very unpleasant. I
-don’t like it at all. It simply goes to show that I was right in not
-allowing you girls to come down here alone. Some unknown person has
-evidently been hidden back there in those woods watching us.”
-
-Miss Martha shook a dramatic finger toward the jungle.
-
-“Oh!” Bee gave a quick, startled gasp. “I wonder----”
-
-“What is it, Beatrice? Tell me instantly,” commanded Miss Carroll.
-
-“Why--nothing--only----” Bee hesitated. “Yesterday when we were down
-here,” she continued, “I saw a--a young girl standing back in a thicket
-watching us. She might be the one----”
-
-“She might indeed,” grimly concurred Miss Martha. “I haven’t the least
-doubt but that she appropriated it. I have been told that the negroes
-down here are a thieving lot. Strange she didn’t take my parasol.”
-
-“But this girl I saw was as white as Patsy or I,” protested Bee. “She
-was so pretty. I don’t believe----”
-
-“I would far rather lay the loss of my book to her than to some
-prowling tramp,” retorted Miss Martha.
-
-“A person who would take an ordinary cloth-bound book and not an
-expensive white silk parasol can’t be a very desperate character,”
-surmised Patsy gaily. “I guess there’s really nothing to worry about.
-Perhaps this wood nymph of Bee’s is fond of reading.”
-
-“I am not inclined to pass over the incident so lightly,” disagreed
-her aunt. “I shall insist on Robert’s finding out who this girl is and
-all about her.”
-
-Some further discussion of the affair ensued during which Miss Carroll
-again repeated her stern injunction: “You must never come down here
-to bathe unless either my brother or I are with you. It strikes me
-that this community is entirely too full of thieves and lunatics for
-comfort.”
-
-“I’m pretty sure that it was our wood nymph who made off with Aunt
-Martha’s book,” confided Patsy to Bee as they finally started for the
-bath house. “I have a scheme of my own that I’m going to carry out. If
-it works--well, just watch me to-morrow and see. I’m not going to tell
-you about it now, so don’t ask me.”
-
-“All right, keep it to yourself. I’d rather not hear it, anyway,”
-amiably responded Bee. “It will be more fun just to watch your
-mysterious movements and----”
-
-“Bee,” interrupted Patsy, “things _are_ really a little mysterious,
-aren’t they? First we run across that queer, terrible old woman who
-talks in riddles about Eulalie and Camillo and our being thieves, etc.
-Then you see a wood nymph, and next day Auntie’s book vanishes into
-thin air. We simply must find someone who can tell us something about
-who’s who at Las Golondrinas. The minute I get back to the house I’m
-going to hunt up Dad’s new man, Carlos, and quiz him. He must certainly
-know a little about things around here.”
-
-It being after one o’clock when the party returned to the house,
-luncheon immediately claimed Patsy’s attention. Inquiry of her father
-as to where she might find Carlos resulted in the disappointing
-information that he had ridden out to the stock farm early that morning
-and would not return until late in the evening.
-
-Mr. Carroll appeared somewhat concerned over his sister’s account
-of the sudden disappearance of her book. Informed of the young girl
-Beatrice had spied watching the Wayfarers from the bushes on the
-previous day, a light of sudden recollection leaped into his eyes.
-
-“Was the girl you saw a black-eyed, elfish-looking youngster with long
-black hair hanging about her face?” he asked Beatrice.
-
-“Yes,” nodded Beatrice. “You must have seen her, too,” she added with
-quick interest.
-
-“Where did you see her, Dad?” demanded Patsy excitedly.
-
-“Uncle Jemmy and I surprised her the other day in the orange grove
-nearest to the lower end of the estate. She was sitting under a
-palmetto tree, singing to herself. She had a wreath of white flowers on
-her head and looked for all the world like a mischievous wood sprite.”
-Mr. Carroll smiled reminiscently. “The moment she caught sight of us
-she jumped up from the ground and was off like the wind through the
-grove. I haven’t the least idea where she went. I asked old Jemmy about
-her, but he’d never seen her before. He’s not familiar with this part
-of the country, you know.”
-
-“As I remarked this morning to the girls, there seem to be altogether
-too many queer persons in this vicinity for comfort,” Miss Martha
-commented in a displeased tone. “Have you made inquiry yet, Robert, of
-your new man regarding that demented old woman?”
-
-“No; I forgot all about her,” Mr. Carroll admitted rather sheepishly.
-“I’ll make it a point to do so to-morrow.”
-
-“You might inquire about this girl at the same time,” pursued his
-sister. “It is very necessary that we should know exactly who these
-persons are and what we may expect from them.”
-
-“This little girl may be the daughter of one of the fishermen. There
-are a few families of fisher-folk living in shacks farther up the
-beach. I noticed half a dozen bare-footed youngsters playing on the
-sands when I called on old Nathan, the fisherman, yesterday.”
-
-“It is unfortunate that this property of yours happens to be so
-isolated,” deplored Miss Carroll. “Our only neighbors are, apparently,
-fisher-folk, one lunatic and a few negroes.”
-
-“Never mind, Auntie. The Wayfarers are sufficient unto themselves,”
-consoled Patsy. “We can get along beautifully without neighbors.”
-
-“If you feel uneasy about staying here, Martha, then I’ll make
-arrangements for you and the girls at one of the Beach hotels,” offered
-Mr. Carroll solicitously.
-
-“I’m not in the least uneasy,” calmly assured Miss Martha. “I rather
-enjoy the novelty of this old place. Certainly I would not care to
-leave it now, since you have gone to so much trouble to get it ready
-for us. I merely wish to be sure that we shall not be annoyed by
-irresponsible or dangerous characters. The very fact that we have no
-near neighbors of our own class makes it necessary for us to protect
-ourselves against unpleasant intruders.”
-
-The Wayfarers had awaited Miss Carroll’s reply to her brother’s
-offer with bated breath. When it came, each girlish face expressed
-unmistakable relief. The charm of Las Golondrinas had taken hold of
-them. Patsy, in particular, felt that to be torn away from it now and
-returned to the artificiality of hotel life would be a cross indeed.
-She was anxious to discover if the old house really held a mystery.
-
-“I hardly believe you will be,” responded Mr. Carroll. “A few days and
-I shall have my affairs arranged so as to be with you on most of your
-jaunts. Then we shall be able to find out a good deal more about Las
-Golondrinas and its environments than I’ve had time, thus far, to look
-into.”
-
-“I hope so, I’m sure,” Miss Martha replied in a tone which implied
-anything but hope.
-
-“How would you like to drive to Palm Beach this afternoon, stop at the
-Cocoanut Grove for tea and later take dinner at one of the hotels?”
-proposed Mr. Carroll, with diplomatic intent to change the subject.
-
-This proposal met with instant enthusiastic response from the girls.
-Even Miss Carroll graciously admitted that it would be pleasant.
-
-Luncheon over, the Wayfarers promptly scurried upstairs to decide
-the momentous questions of gowns. To go to Palm Beach merely for an
-afternoon and evening’s outing was an entirely different matter from
-going there for the remainder of their vacation. Tea in the Cocoanut
-Grove promised to be interesting.
-
-When, at three o’clock that afternoon, the automobile sped down the
-oleander drive laden with its freight of daintily gowned girls, Miss
-Martha’s equanimity had quite returned. Seated in the tonneau between
-Mabel and Eleanor, she looked very stately and imposing in a smart
-frock of heavy wistaria silk, a plumed hat to match setting off to
-perfection her thick snowy hair and patrician features.
-
-Bee was wearing her best gown, a becoming affair of pale pink taffeta
-which had been fashioned by her mother’s clever fingers. Mabel had
-chosen a dainty little dress of pale green jersey silk, embroidered
-with white daisies. Eleanor wore a fluffy blue chiffon creation, while
-Patsy was radiantly pretty in white net over white taffeta.
-
-That the Wayfarers presented a charming appearance in their
-delicately-hued finery at least one spectator to their departure could
-testify. As the car swept through the gateway and onto the white public
-road, from behind a flower-laden bush situated just inside the gates,
-a black-haired, bare-footed girl emerged and peered wistfully through
-the iron palings after the fast vanishing automobile.
-
-When it had entirely disappeared from view, the elfish little watcher
-turned and threw herself face downward in the tangled grass and began
-a low disconsolate wailing, her thin shoulders shaking with convulsive
-sobs. There she continued to lie, beating the long grass with two small
-brown clenched hands.
-
-Her emotion having finally spent itself she slowly dragged herself to
-her feet, tossed her long heavy black hair out of her eyes, and sped
-like a fawn across the lawn. Coming at last to a clump of low growing
-bushes, she dived in under them and reappeared, holding something in
-her hand. Then she was off again, this time toward the house. Slipping
-through the oleander hedge with the ease of a wood sprite, she made
-final port at the entrance to the patio.
-
-The doors stood open. Like a shadow she flitted through the doorway and
-into the patio beyond. On a rustic seat near the fountain, she laid the
-object which she carried in one thin brown hand. Then she turned and
-ran in the direction from which she had come like a timid, hunted young
-animal.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XII
-
-INTERVIEWING CARLOS
-
-
-Strolling into the patio with Eleanor next morning, Miss Martha Carroll
-was treated to a surprise. Passing one of the rustic seats set at
-intervals about the patio, her eyes chanced to come to rest on an
-astonishingly familiar object. It was nothing more nor less than a fat,
-red-covered volume lying on the seat before which she had paused in
-sheer amazement.
-
-“Why--where----” she stammered, adjusting her eye-glasses and staring
-hard at the gilt-lettered title, “The Interrupted Quest,” which
-conspicuously adorned the book’s front cover.
-
-“This is really amazing!” she exclaimed, addressing Eleanor, who had
-halted beside her.
-
-“What is it, Miss Martha?”
-
-Eleanor looked wonderingly curious. She had not the remotest idea of
-the cause of Miss Martha’s agitation.
-
-“_This_ is the book that disappeared from the beach yesterday morning,”
-emphasized Miss Carroll. “_How_, I should like to know, does it happen
-to be here?”
-
-“Why!” Eleanor’s blue eyes grew round with surprise. “That’s queer,
-isn’t it?”
-
-“Too queer by far,” was the displeased answer.
-
-“Oh, look!”
-
-Eleanor had picked up the book from the seat. As she raised it, a slip
-of paper fluttered to the stone floor of the patio. Stooping, she
-gathered it in. Written on it in pencil was the single word: “Gracias.”
-
-“It’s meant for ‘gracious,’ I guess,” puzzled Eleanor, “only it isn’t
-spelled correctly. I really believe it must have been that queer girl
-Bee saw who took the book. She’s honest, at least. She returned it. But
-why in the world did she write ‘gracious’ on that slip of paper? Here
-come the girls. May I tell them, Miss Martha?”
-
-“Of course.”
-
-Miss Carroll had seated herself on the bench, a decided frown between
-her brows. She did not in the least relish this latest performance on
-the part of the elflike stranger. The unexpected return of the book
-indicated that the odd little prowler was evidently, as Eleanor said,
-honest. Yet the fact remained that she _was_ a prowler, which annoyed
-Miss Martha considerably.
-
-“The lost is found!” Eleanor called triumphantly across the patio to
-the approaching trio of girls. “What do you think of this?”
-
-She held up the book for them to see.
-
-“Why, it _is_ Auntie’s lost book, isn’t it? Where did it come from,
-Nellie?”
-
-Patsy’s face registered a mystified surprise which was also reflected
-on the features of her companions.
-
-“We found it lying on that seat,” explained Eleanor. “This slip of
-paper was tucked into it.”
-
-Patsy took the bit of paper which Eleanor proffered. Mabel and Bee
-eagerly peered at it over her shoulder as she held it up and inspected
-the one word written on it. Her brows contracted in a puzzled frown.
-
-“Humph!” she ejaculated. “I don’t see---”
-
-“I do,” interrupted Mabel with a little laugh. “That word ‘gracias’ is
-Spanish for ‘thank you.’”
-
-“Then my wood nymph is _Spanish_!” Bee cried out. “It was she who took
-the book. The whole thing is as plain as daylight. She only borrowed
-it over night to _read_. Miss Martha’s pretty white parasol didn’t
-interest her at all. It was the book that took her eye. And why?
-Because she wanted to read it, of course.”
-
-“Go ahead, Sherlock,” teased Patsy. “What next?”
-
-“Well----” Bee laughed and looked slightly confused. “We know, too,
-that she is honest, or----”
-
-“That’s just what I said,” interposed Eleanor.
-
-“Really, Beatrice, I can hardly imagine a wild-looking girl such as you
-have described as having literary tastes,” broke in Miss Martha drily.
-“It is far more reasonable to assume that the bright color of my book
-caught her eye. She may have thought it a picture book. Finding out
-that it was not, some strange impulse of her own caused her to return
-it. Her methods seem to me decidedly primitive. Why doesn’t she come
-out and show herself openly, instead of dodging about under cover like
-a young savage?”
-
-“She is probably just awfully shy,” staunchly defended Patsy. “She
-can’t really be quite a savage. She wrote ‘thank you’ on that bit of
-paper. That proves two things. She knows how to write and is not too
-ignorant to be polite.”
-
-“I don’t consider prowling about in the bushes and spying upon
-strangers marked indications of politeness,” was Miss Carroll’s
-satirical return. “I can’t say I relish the prospect of having this
-young imp bob up at us unexpectedly at every turn we make.”
-
-The Wayfarers giggled in unison at this remark. Miss Martha did not
-resent their mirth. She even smiled a little herself, a fact which
-Patsy shrewdly noted. It informed her that her aunt was not seriously
-prejudiced against the will-o’-the-wisp little stranger. Like
-everything else at Las Golondrinas, this new feature of mystery made
-strong appeal to Patsy. She was inwardly resolved eventually to hunt
-down the elusive, black-eyed sprite and make her acquaintance.
-
-With this idea in mind she now made energetic announcement:
-
-“I’m going to interview Carlos this minute and learn a few things
-about the natives. Anybody who wants to come along has my gracious
-permission. If nobody wants to, then I’m going just the same. He’s down
-at the stable this morning. Dad said so.”
-
-“I’ll go,” accepted Bee. “I have almost as much curiosity as you.”
-
-“I don’t feel like going out in the hot sun,” Eleanor said. “It’s so
-nice and cool here in the patio. I have no curiosity.”
-
-“You mean energy,” corrected Bee.
-
-“I have neither,” beamed Eleanor, “so just run along without me. You
-can tell me all about what Carlos said when you come back. I’ll be
-right here waiting for you.”
-
-“You may wait a long while,” jeered Mabel. “I’m not so lazy as you. I’m
-going with the girls and practice my Spanish on Carlos.”
-
-“I hope he’ll survive it,” retaliated Eleanor.
-
-“You should worry. _Adios._”
-
-Mabel waved a derisive farewell to her sister as she turned to follow
-Patsy and Bee, who had already started for the main exit to the patio,
-which opened onto the driveway.
-
-Arm in arm, the trio followed the drive, coming at last to the stable,
-a rambling stone structure situated at some distance below the house.
-
-“There’s Carlos now! He looks like a cowboy, doesn’t he?”
-
-Patsy had spied her father’s new man standing in front of the stable
-engaged in lighting a cigarette. Attired in an open-necked flannel
-shirt, brown corduroy trousers and a weather-stained sombrero, the
-Mexican presented a rather picturesque appearance, or so the Wayfarers
-thought.
-
-Immediately he caught sight of the three girls, the man’s dark features
-grew lowering. He made a move as though to enter the stable door, then
-stood still, regarding his advancing visitors with sullen indifference.
-
-“You speak to him, Mab,” urged Patsy in an undertone. “Say something to
-him in Spanish.”
-
-“Oh, I can’t,” demurred Mabel. “What shall I say?”
-
-“Say ‘good-day’ in Spanish,” prompted Patsy. “Go ahead.”
-
-Raising her voice, Mabel called out politely: “_Buenos dias, señor._”
-
-The man made no effort to doff his sombrero in response to this hail.
-Neither did he leave off smoking his cigarette.
-
-“I spik English,” he announced in a sulky tone that suggested affront
-rather than appreciation of being thus addressed in his native tongue.
-
-“So much the better for us then.”
-
-Patsy now became spokesman. There was a gleam of lively resentment in
-her gray eyes, born of the man’s ungracious behavior.
-
-For an instant the two regarded each other steadily. Something in the
-girl’s resolute, unflinching gaze caused the man’s small black eyes to
-waver. He glimpsed in that direct glance the same determined will he
-had already discovered the “Señor Carroll” possessed.
-
-As if unwillingly impelled to break the silence he mumbled sulkily:
-“What do you desire?”
-
-“To ask you a few questions,” tersely returned Patsy. “My father tells
-me that you used to work for Mr. Fereda, the old Spanish gentleman who
-once owned this estate. So you must know something of the Feredas, and
-also of the few persons who live in this vicinity.”
-
-Patsy’s former intent to be affable had completely vanished. Decidedly
-miffed by the man’s too evident surliness, she spoke almost imperiously.
-
-“Las Golondrinas covers much ground. I know a little; not much,” was
-the evasive answer.
-
-“I am sure you must know something of the queer old woman who lives
-in a little cottage outside the estate, and just beyond the orange
-groves,” Patsy coolly challenged. “Who is she and how long has she
-lived there?”
-
-“Ah, yes, I know.”
-
-Carlos blew a cloud of cigarette smoke into the air and indifferently
-watched it drift away.
-
-“She is Rosita,” he shrugged. “Always she has lived there. As children
-she and old Manuel played together. Her father was the servant of his
-father, Enrico Fereda. Rosita is the widow for many years.”
-
-Three pairs of alert ears avidly picked up the name “Enrico.” Here it
-seemed was still another member of the Fereda family.
-
-“Is she crazy?”
-
-It was Mabel who now tactlessly interposed with this blunt question.
-
-It had an electrical effect upon Carlos. His attitude of bored
-indifference left him. His lax shoulders straightened with an angry
-jerk. His black eyes narrowed in sinister fashion.
-
-“You spik of my grandmother, _señorita_!” he rebuked, drawing himself
-up with an air of offended dignity.
-
-“I beg your pardon,” Mabel said hastily, her color rising.
-
-In spite of her embarrassment she was seized with an irresistible
-desire to laugh. Realizing that laughter was imminent, she turned to
-Patsy with: “I’m going back to the house. I’ll see you later,” and
-ingloriously retired from the scene, leaving Patsy and Bee to conduct
-the remainder of the interview.
-
-“Why the _señorita_ so spik of my grandmother? You have seen her?”
-
-Carlos threw away his cigarette and appeared for the first time to
-take an interest in things. Bee thought she detected a faint note
-of concern in his voice. She had been watching him closely and had
-already decided that he knew a great deal more about Las Golondrinas
-and its environments than he pretended to know.
-
-“We saw your grandmother’s cottage the other day from the orange
-groves. We walked over to it. Your grandmother came out of the cottage
-and asked us who we were. When we told her and tried to ask her some
-questions about the Fereda family, she screamed and raved at us and
-ordered us to go away and not come back. She behaved and talked very
-much like a crazy person.”
-
-It was Bee who purposely made this somewhat full explanation. She had a
-curious conviction that her recital of old Rosita’s wild outburst was a
-piece of news to Carlos, and that it did not please him.
-
-“Rosita is not _loco_,” Carlos shook his head in sullen contradiction.
-“What you want know ’bout the family de Fereda? Why you want know?”
-
-As Patsy’s original intention had been to quiz Carlos about the
-Feredas, she now hailed the opportunity. The identity of Rosita having
-been established and her sanity vouched for by her grandson, at least,
-Patsy was eager to go on to the Feredas themselves. Carlos appeared,
-too, to be thawing out a trifle. She had, at least, aroused his
-curiosity.
-
-“We would like to know the history of the Feredas because we think it
-would be interesting. We know by the portraits in the picture gallery
-that they were a very old family,” she began eagerly. “Do you know
-anything about those portraits? Have you ever been in the gallery?”
-
-“I have been; remember nothing,” was the discouraging response. “Of the
-history this family know nothing.”
-
-Carlos’ face had resumed its mask of indifference. Only his black eyes
-held a curiously alert expression which watchful Bee did not fail to
-note.
-
-Patsy looked her disappointment. She had hoped to extract from Carlos
-some information not only about the Feredas but also concerning the
-portrait which so greatly interested her. Failing, she next bethought
-herself of the mysterious wood nymph.
-
-“The other day my father saw a pretty young girl with black eyes and
-long black hair in our orange groves,” she began afresh. “My friend,
-Miss Forbes,” Patsy indicated Bee, “also saw her in the woods near our
-bathing beach. Can you tell me who she is? She certainly must live not
-far from here.”
-
-A swift flash of anger flitted across the Mexican’s face. It was gone
-almost instantly.
-
-“I have not seen,” he denied. “Now I go. I have the work to do.”
-
-Wheeling abruptly he started off across the grass, almost on the run,
-and was soon lost to view among the trees.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIII
-
-TWO LETTERS
-
-
-“Did you ever try to talk to a more aggravating person?” Patsy cried
-out vexedly to Bee. “Does he know anything, or doesn’t he?”
-
-“He knows a good deal, but he won’t tell it,” returned Bee shrewdly.
-“For one thing he knows who our wood nymph is. He looked awfully black
-when you mentioned her. I wonder why?”
-
-“She may be a relative,” surmised Patsy. “She’s Spanish or Mexican, I’m
-sure.”
-
-“I hadn’t thought of that. You’re a better deducer than I,” laughed Bee.
-
-“Thank you, thank you!” Patsy bowed exaggerated gratitude.
-
-“If this Rosita is really Carlos’ grandmother, as he says she is,
-she certainly never told him about our going to the cottage that
-day,” declared Beatrice. “He pretended to be indifferent, but he was
-surprised. I read it in his eyes. Now why didn’t she tell him?”
-
-“I give it up. I give the whole thing up. Every time we try to find out
-anything about these Feredas we bump up against a lot of questions that
-we can’t answer,” sighed Patsy. “We might better forget the whole thing
-and just enjoy ourselves.”
-
-“Let’s go back to the house,” proposed Beatrice, “and tell that
-faithless Mab what we think of her for beating it off in such a hurry.”
-
-“She knew she was going to laugh. I could hardly keep my face straight.
-Carlos straightened up and looked so injured. I don’t see, though, why
-he should call his grandmother Rosita. I never called _my_ grandmother,
-Priscilla, I’m sure, even in my ignorant infancy,” giggled Patsy.
-
-“It would have sounded rather disrespectful,” agreed Bee, echoing the
-giggle. “I can’t say much for Carlos’ manners. He never raised his hat
-to us at all, but stood there and blew smoke right in our faces.”
-
-“Dad would be awfully cross if he knew that. I’m not going to tell
-him. He’s had so much trouble hiring a man for this place. He’d go to
-Carlos and reprimand him and Carlos would leave and----Oh, what’s the
-use? We won’t bother with Carlos again, anyway. He’d never tell us
-anything. I’m going to write a letter to-day to Eulalie Fereda and have
-Mr. Haynes, the agent, forward it. I simply must learn the history of
-that dark, wicked-looking cavalier in the picture gallery. Of course
-she may not answer it, but then, she may. It’s worth trying, anyway.”
-
-Entering the patio and finding it deserted, Bee and Patsy passed
-through it and on up stairs in search of Mabel. They finally found her
-in the big, somber sitting room, engaged in her favorite occupation of
-hunting for the secret drawer which she stoutly insisted the quaint
-walnut desk contained. This idea having become firmly fixed in her
-mind she derived signal amusement in searching for the mythical secret
-drawer.
-
-“Is she crazy?” jeered Patsy, pointing to Mabel, who was kneeling
-before the massive piece of furniture, her exploring fingers carefully
-going over every inch of the elaborately carved solid front of the desk.
-
-“Oh, so you’ve come back!” Mabel sprang to her feet, laughing. “I had
-to run away,” she apologized. “I felt so silly. I didn’t want to laugh
-in his very face. How was I to know that the witch woman was Carlos’
-grandmother? Did you find out anything?”
-
-“No.” Bee shook her head. “Carlos will never set the world on fire
-as an information bureau. According to his own statements, he sees
-nothing, knows nothing and remembers nothing. He is a positive clam!”
-
-“I’m going to write to Eulalie _now_, while it’s on my mind,” announced
-Patsy. “Bee, you may play around with Mab while I’m writing. You may
-both hunt for the secret drawer. When I finish my letter, I’ll read
-it to you. Then I’m going to write another. When that’s done we are
-all going down to the beach. A great scheme is seething in my fertile
-brain. Where’s Nellie?”
-
-“In our room, overhauling her trunk,” informed Mabel. “We can’t go to
-the beach without Miss Martha, and she said she wouldn’t go to-day.”
-
-“Leave that to me,” retorted Patsy. “I know what I’m doing, even if you
-don’t.”
-
-For the next half-hour, comparative quiet reigned in the big room,
-broken only by an occasional remark or giggle from Bee and Mabel as
-they pursued their fruitless search.
-
-“There!” cried Patsy at last as she signed her name to the letter she
-had just finished writing.
-
-“Listen to this:
-
- “‘DEAR MISS FEREDA:
-
- “‘I have heard of you from Mr. Haynes, the agent, from whom my
- father, Robert Carroll, purchased Las Golondrinas. My aunt, my
- father, three of my friends and myself are at present spending
- a few weeks’ vacation at Las Golondrinas. We are greatly
- interested in the portrait gallery and should appreciate it
- if you would tell us something of the large portrait of the
- Spanish cavalier which hangs in the center of the gallery.
- He is a most romantic-looking person and must surely have an
- interesting history. We are very curious about him.
-
- “‘We have wondered that you did not reserve the collection of
- family portraits before selling the estate. If you would like
- to have them they are at your disposal. My father and I both
- feel that you have first right to them.
-
- “‘Las Golondrinas is an ideal place in which to spend a
- vacation. We are quite in love with this quaint old house and
- its furnishings. Would you object to telling us when the house
- was built and how many generations of Feredas have lived in it?
- Judging from the many antiques it contained and its general
- plan, it must be very old indeed.
-
- “‘We are sorry not to have met you personally and hope some
- day to have that pleasure. I understand that you are a young
- girl of about my own age. No doubt we should find that we had
- many interests in common. It would be a pleasure to have you
- visit me while we are here and meet my father, my aunt and my
- friends. Could you not arrange to pay us a visit?
-
- “‘I shall hope to hear from you and that we may become better
- acquainted in the near future.
-
- “‘Yours sincerely,
-
- “‘PATRICIA CARROLL.’
-
-“How is that for a nice, polite letter to Eulalie?” Patsy inquired.
-“Any criticisms? If so, out with them now. If not, into an envelope it
-goes and on its way to the last of the Feredas, wherever she may happen
-to be. I’m not really counting much on an answer. I haven’t the least
-idea in the world what sort of girl this Eulalie is. Anyway it will do
-no harm to write her. If she should answer and we became acquainted and
-she paid us a visit, it would be splendid.”
-
-“I think it’s a nice letter,” praised Mabel. “Go ahead and send it,
-Patsy.”
-
-“I am sure she’ll like it,” approved Bee. “It’s thoughtful in your
-father to offer her the collection of portraits.”
-
-“It seems funny to me that she didn’t reserve them. Maybe she didn’t
-want them. She might have grown tired of seeing them every day
-for so many years,” speculated Mabel. “They aren’t a particularly
-cheerful-looking lot of ladies and gentlemen. They all look so cold and
-stern and tragic.”
-
-“Auntie says they gave her the horrors,” chuckled Patsy. “When I told
-her that Dad said I could write to Eulalie and ask her if she wanted
-the collection, Auntie said: ‘A very sensible idea. She is welcome to
-them. If she doesn’t want them I shall have the gallery cleared out
-before we come down here next season.”
-
-“If Eulalie doesn’t want them, what will become of them?” Bee asked
-thoughtfully. “Would your father sell them? Suppose you were to find
-that some of them had been painted by famous artists? Then they’d be
-very valuable.”
-
-“I don’t know what Dad would do in that case. He spoke of having an art
-collector come down here and look them over, you know. Of course, if
-Eulalie sends for them, that’s the end of it. If she doesn’t, Auntie
-will have them taken down. I know one thing. She hates the sight of
-them. Now I must write another letter. I hope I sha’n’t be disturbed
-while I’m writing it.”
-
-Patsy beamed on her chums with owlish significance.
-
-“Isn’t she snippy?” sniffed Mabel. “Come on, Bee, we’ve got to find
-that secret drawer. I hope we sha’n’t be disturbed while we’re hunting
-for it.”
-
-Patsy merely grinned amiably at this thrust and settled herself to the
-writing of her letter. A little smile curved her red lips as the pen
-fled over the paper.
-
-For ten minutes she continued to write, then called out:
-
-“Come here, children, and sign this letter.”
-
-“Never put your signature to a paper until you know what it’s all
-about,” Bee warned Mabel.
-
-“Oh, you needn’t be so cautious. I was going to let you see what I
-wrote. Here!”
-
-Patsy handed the letter to Bee.
-
-Heads together, Mabel and Bee proceeded to read that which made them
-smile.
-
- “DEAR WOOD NYMPH,” the letter said. “Why won’t you come and
- play with us, instead of hiding away in the thickets? We are
- just four young girls like yourself, so you need not be afraid
- of us. We found the red book in the patio, so we know that you
- must have paid us a call yesterday while we were away from Las
- Golondrinas.
-
- “Why don’t you come and see us when we are at home? We’d love
- to have you. The next time you see us at the bathing-beach
- please come out of the woods and show us that you are not a
- tricksy sprite but a real live girl like ourselves.
-
- “We are placing this note in a book which we are sure you will
- like to read. We are going to leave the book on the sands just
- where you found the red book. After you have read it, won’t you
- bring it straight to us and get acquainted?
-
- “Your friends,
-
- “THE WAYFARERS.”
-
-Below “The Wayfarers” Patsy had signed her own name, allowing
-sufficient space on the page for the names of her friends.
-
-“That’s sweet in you, Patsy,” lauded Mabel. “Give me your pen. I’ll
-sign my name in a hurry.”
-
-Mabel promptly affixed her name to the letter, Beatrice following suit.
-
-“We must get Nellie to sign it, too. You and Bee take it to her, Mab,”
-Patsy requested. “I’m going to ask Auntie if we can’t walk down to
-the beach, for once, without an escort. It’s not as if we were going
-bathing. We’ll just leave the book and come straight back. We won’t be
-in any danger.”
-
-“Where’s the book?” inquired Bee.
-
-“In my room. I’m going to put the letter in that book we read on the
-train when we were coming down here. You remember. It was ‘The Oriole.’
-It’s such a pretty story and not too grown-up for our wood nymph. I’ll
-meet you girls in the patio.”
-
-While Bee and Mabel went to inform Eleanor of the proposed expedition
-and obtain her signature to the letter, Patsy took upon herself the
-delicate task of interviewing her aunt.
-
-She found Miss Martha on one of the balconies which overlooked the
-patio, a bit of embroidery in her hands, a book open on one knee. Miss
-Carroll had triumphantly mastered the difficult art of reading and
-embroidering at the same time.
-
-Having come to the belief that it was really the girls’ wood nymph
-who had taken and subsequently returned her book, Miss Martha was now
-inclined to lay less stress on the incident. Her theory of tramps
-having been shaken, she demurred a little, then gave a somewhat
-reluctant consent to Patsy’s plea.
-
-“You may go this once, but be sure you keep together and don’t loiter
-down there at the beach. I can’t say I specially approve of your trying
-to make friends with this young heathen. Once you come to know her you
-may find her very troublesome. However, you may be able to help her in
-some way. Your motive is good. That’s really the only reason I can give
-for allowing you to carry out your plan. Be sure you come back in time
-for luncheon.”
-
-“You’re as good as gold, Auntie, dear.” Patsy tumultuously embraced
-Miss Martha.
-
-“Really, Patsy, you fairly pull one to pieces,” grumbled Miss Carroll,
-grabbing ineffectually for embroidery and book as she emerged from that
-bear-like embrace.
-
-“You like it, though.” Patsy deftly garnered book and embroidery from
-the balcony floor and restored them to Miss Carroll’s lap. Dropping a
-kiss on her aunt’s snowy hair she light-heartedly left the balcony to
-go to her own room for the book which was to play an important part in
-her kindly little plan.
-
-Hastily securing the book, Patsy set her broad-brimmed Panama on her
-auburn head at a rakish angle and dashed from the room in her usual
-whirlwind fashion, banging the door behind her.
-
-A few steps and she had entered the picture gallery through which she
-intended to pass on her way to the stairs. As she entered it a faint
-sound assailed her ears. She could not place in her own mind the nature
-of the sound, yet it startled her, simply because it had proceeded from
-the very center of the gallery.
-
-An unbidden impulse caused her to direct her eyes toward the portrait
-cavalier. She caught her breath sharply. A curious chill crept up
-and down her spine. Was she dreaming, or had the man in the picture
-actually moved? With a little gasp of terror Patsy fled for the stairs
-and clattered down them, feeling as though the sinister cavalier was
-directly at her heels.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIV
-
-A REAL ADVENTURE
-
-
-“What on earth is the matter?”
-
-Seated on a bench beside Mabel and Eleanor, Bee sprang up in alarm as
-Patsy fairly tore into the patio and dropped limply upon another seat.
-
-“Oh, girls, the picture!” she exclaimed. “That cavalier! He _moved_!
-I’m sure he did! It gave me the creeps! I was hustling through the
-gallery and I heard a faint, queer noise. I can’t describe it. It
-seemed to come right from the middle of the gallery. I looked toward
-that picture and it moved, or else the cavalier moved. I don’t know
-which.”
-
-“You just thought you saw something move,” soothed Bee, sitting down
-beside her chum and patting her hand. “It was probably the way the
-light happened to strike on the picture that made it seem so. As for a
-queer sound! Every sound echoes and re-echoes in these old corridors.
-We heard you bang your door clear down here. You must have heard an
-echo of that bang in the gallery.”
-
-“I’m a goose, I guess.” Patsy sheepishly ducked her head. “I never
-thought of the light falling like that on the picture. That’s what I
-saw, I suppose.”
-
-“What has happened, Patsy?” called a dignified but anxious voice from
-the balcony. Miss Martha stood leaning over the rail looking down
-concernedly at her niece.
-
-“Nothing, Auntie, dear. I heard a queer noise in the gallery and it
-startled me. Bee says it was only the echo from the bang I gave my
-door. I’m all right,” Patsy sturdily insisted, rising from the seat and
-blowing a gay little kiss to her aunt.
-
-“I _heard_ you bang your door,” was the significant response. “When you
-come back from your walk you must take one of those capsules that Dr.
-Hilliard prescribed for my nerves.”
-
-“All right,” Patsy dutifully agreed. “Good-bye, Auntie. We’re going
-now.”
-
-“Good-bye. Remember to be back by one o’clock.”
-
-The three other girls calling a blithe good-bye to Miss Carroll,
-the quartette left the patio with an alacrity that betokened their
-eagerness for the proposed walk.
-
-“I didn’t care to tell her about thinking I saw the picture move,”
-confessed Patsy. “As it is I’m in for swallowing one of those fat nerve
-capsules that Auntie always keeps on hand. I need it about as much as
-a bird needs a hat. We’ll have to walk fairly fast to get to the beach
-and back by luncheon time, girls. We’ll lay the book on the sand, then
-watch from the bath house windows to see what happens.”
-
-“I hope our wood nymph comes along and finds it to-day,” commented
-Mabel. “Still she might not go near the beach for several days. After
-all, there’s only a chance that she’ll see it and pick it up.”
-
-“I have an idea she goes to the beach every day,” said Beatrice. “She
-may be as curious about us as we are about her. She may be so shy,
-though, that she won’t come near us, even if she does read our note.”
-
-Thus discussing the object of their little scheme, the Wayfarers forged
-ahead at a swinging pace. Soon they had left the highway and were on
-the narrow, white, palm-lined road to the beach, talking busily as they
-went. Once in the jungle four pairs of eyes kept up an alert watch on
-both sides of the road in the hope of spying the elusive wood nymph.
-
-[Illustration: She caught her breath sharply, … had the man in the
-picture actually moved?]
-
-They came at last to the beach, however, without having seen any signs
-of their quarry. After they had gone through the little ceremony of
-placing the book on the spot on the sands from which the other book had
-disappeared, they went over to the bath house and, entering, eagerly
-watched from one of its windows.
-
-After lingering there for half an hour, during which period the fateful
-book remained exactly where it had been laid, they gave up the vigil
-for that day and reluctantly started on the homeward hike.
-
-“Of course we couldn’t really expect anything would happen just because
-we wanted it to,” declared Eleanor.
-
-“Of course not,” her chums concurred. In her heart, however, each girl
-had been secretly hoping that something _would_ happen.
-
-The following morning saw the Wayfarers again on the sands. This time,
-however, they had come down to the beach for a swim, Miss Martha
-dutifully accompanying them.
-
-Almost the first object which met their gaze when they reached the
-sands was the book. It still lay exactly where Patsy had deposited it,
-the white edge of the letter showing above the book’s blue binding.
-
-“She hasn’t been here!” Patsy cried out disappointedly. “I guess our
-plan isn’t going to amount to much after all.”
-
-“Oh, don’t be discouraged,” smiled Eleanor. “Give her time.”
-
-“Let’s forget all about it,” suggested Bee. “Nothing ever happens when
-one’s awfully anxious for it to happen. It generally happens after one
-has stopped thinking about it and gone on to something else. It’s a
-glorious morning for a swim. Let’s hurry into our bathing suits and
-take advantage of it.”
-
-This wise view of the matter appealing to the disappointed authors of
-the little plot, the four girls betook themselves to the bath house to
-get ready for their morning dip in the ocean.
-
-Having now become mildly interested in Patsy’s scheme to catch a wood
-nymph, Miss Martha took pains to further it by establishing herself on
-the sands at a point on the far side of the bath house. From there she
-could neither see the spot where the book lay, nor could anyone who
-might chance to approach it see her. This maneuver was not lost on her
-charges, who agreed with Patsy’s gleeful assertion that Auntie was
-just as anxious for “something to happen” as they were.
-
-Soon engrossed in the fun of splashing and swimming about in the
-sun-warmed salt water, the Wayfarers forgot everything that did not
-pertain to the enjoyment of the moment.
-
-True, on first entering the surf Patsy cast an occasional glance
-beachward. Bee’s merry challenge, “I’ll race you again to-day as far as
-the bend and back,” was the last touch needed to drive all thought of
-the mysterious wood nymph from Patsy’s mind.
-
-Sturdy Bee proved herself no mean antagonist. When Patsy finally
-arrived at the starting point only a yard ahead of her chum, she was
-ready to throw herself down on the sands and rest after her strenuous
-swim. Bee, however, showed no sign of fatigue.
-
-“You beat me, but only by a yard. To-morrow I’ll beat you.” Bee stood
-over Patsy, flushed and laughing.
-
-“I don’t doubt it.” Patsy glanced admiringly up at her chum. “You’re a
-stronger swimmer than I, Bee. With a little more practice you’ll be a
-wonder. Here I am resting. You look ready to start out all over again.”
-
-“I’m not a bit tired,” Bee said with a little air of pride. “I’ll
-prove it by swimming out there where Mabel and Nellie are.”
-
-Stretched full length in the sand, Patsy lazily sat up and watched her
-chum as Bee waded out in the surf, reached swimming depth and struck
-out for a point not far ahead where Mabel and Eleanor were placidly
-swimming about.
-
-Indolently content to remain inactive, Patsy continued to watch her
-three friends for a little, then lay down again, one arm thrown across
-her eyes to shut out the sun.
-
-While she lay there, enjoying the luxury of thinking about nothing in
-particular, tardy recollection of the blue book suddenly crossed her
-brain. It impelled her to sit up again with a jerk and cast a quick
-glance toward the object of her thoughts.
-
-Next instant a bare-footed figure in a white bathing suit flashed
-across the sands toward the jungle on a wild run. In that one glance
-Patsy had seen more than the blue book. She had seen a slim young girl,
-her small, beautiful face framed in masses of midnight black hair, flit
-suddenly out of the jungle, eagerly snatch up the book and dart off
-with it.
-
-First sight of the strange girl and Patsy’s original intention to await
-developments flew to the winds. Obeying a mad impulse to pursue the
-vanishing wood nymph, Patsy plunged into the jungle after her, crying
-out loudly: “Wait a minute! I want to talk to you.”
-
-At sound of the clear, high voice the black-haired girl ahead halted
-briefly. Through the open screen of green, Patsy could see her quite
-plainly. She was looking over her shoulder at her pursuer as though
-undetermined whether to stand her ground or continue her flight.
-
-“Don’t be afraid,” Patsy called out encouragingly. “Please don’t run
-away.”
-
-As she spoke she started quickly forward. Her eyes fixed on the girl,
-her runaway feet plunged themselves into a mass of tangled green vines.
-With a sharp, “Oh!” she pitched headlong into a thicket of low-growing
-bushes.
-
-As she scrambled to her feet she became aware of a loud, metallic
-buzzing in her ears. Then she felt herself being jerked out of the
-thicket by a pair of strong arms and hauled to a bit of dear space
-beyond.
-
-“Stay where you are, _señorita_,” commanded a warning, imperative
-voice. “Move not, I entreat you!”
-
-Bewildered by the suddenness with which things had happened, Patsy
-stood perfectly still, her eyes following the movements of a lithe
-figure, darting this way and that, as though in search of something.
-
-Still in a daze she heard the voice that had addressed her utter a
-low murmur of satisfaction, as its owner stooped and picked up a dead
-branch from under a huge live oak. Two little brown hands played like
-lightning over the thick branch, ripping off the clinging dead twigs.
-Next the denuded branch was thwacked vigorously against the parent oak.
-
-“It is strong enough,” announced a calm voice. “Now we shall see.”
-
-Fascinated, Patsy watched breathlessly. She now understood the
-situation. Her headlong crash into the thicket had stirred up a drowsy
-rattler. The prompt action of her little wood nymph had saved her from
-being bitten by the snake. Now the girl intended to hunt it down and
-kill it. She looked so small and slender. It seemed too dangerous a
-task for her to undertake.
-
-“Oh, please let it alone! It might bite you!” Patsy found herself
-faltering out. “A rattle-snake’s bite is deadly.”
-
-“I have killed many. I am not afraid. Always one must kill the snake.
-It is the sign of the enemy. One kills; so one conquers. _Comprende?_”
-
-The girl shook back her black hair, her red lips parting in a smile
-that lighted her somber face into sunshine. Patsy thought it quite the
-prettiest thing she had ever seen.
-
-Very cautiously the intrepid little hunter began to circle the thicket,
-poking her impromptu weapon into it with every step she took.
-
-“Ah!”
-
-She uttered a shout of triumph as the sinister, buzzing sound Patsy had
-so lately heard began again.
-
-Having located her quarry, the girl proceeded to dispatch it with the
-fearlessness of those long used to the wilds. Her weapon firmly grasped
-in determined hands she rained a fury of strong, steady blows upon the
-rattler. Finally they ceased. Giving his snakeship a final contemptuous
-prod with the branch, she called across the thicket to Patsy:
-
-“Come. You wish to see. He is a very large one. Of a length of eight
-feet, _quisas_. Wait; I will lay him straight on the earth.”
-
-Approaching, Patsy shuddered as her rescuer obligingly poked the dead
-reptile from the spot where it had made its last stand. She shuddered
-again as a small brown hand grasped the still twitching tail and
-straightened the snake out.
-
-“It is the diamond back,” the girl calmly informed. “See.” She pointed
-with the branch, which she still held, to the diamond-shaped markings
-on the snake’s back. “He carried the death in his sting. So we shall
-bury the head, for the sting of a dead snake such as this is safer
-covered.”
-
-“It’s horrible!” shivered Patsy. “It was coiled up in the thicket. I
-must have disturbed it when I fell. I don’t see how I escaped being
-bitten.”
-
-“He was resting at the edge of the thicket, _señorita_,” corrected the
-girl. “Always such as he keep near the edge so that it becomes for them
-thus easy to strike the small creatures they hunt. So you missed him
-and he sang the song of death. I heard that song and came. He had eaten
-not long ago, I believe, and was lazy. So he did not try to go away.
-Now he is dead. So if the enemy comes to me, I must conquer. This is a
-true saying.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XV
-
-DOLORES
-
-
-A sudden silence fell upon the two girls as the picturesque little
-stranger made this solemn announcement. Now that the excitement was
-over the wood nymph began to show signs of returning shyness.
-
-Fearing that she might turn and run away, Patsy stretched forth a slim
-white hand and said winningly:
-
-“I can’t begin to tell you how grateful I am for what you did. You were
-very brave, I think. I’m ever so glad to know you. Can’t we be friends?”
-
-The girl hesitated, a wistful look in her large dark eyes. Very slowly
-she put her small brown hand into Patsy’s extended one.
-
-“I will give you the hand because already I like you,” she said. “I
-cannot be your friend because I am too poor. Always I must wear the
-old ugly dress. Always I must go with the feet bare.”
-
-“That has nothing to do with our being friends,” was Patsy’s gentle
-assurance. “I’m bare-footed, too.” She laughed and thrust forward one
-pink, bare foot. “Just look at my bathing suit. It was wet when I
-started after you. Falling down didn’t improve it.”
-
-“Ah, but your feet are bare because you wish it,” reminded the girl
-sadly. “Never I wish the bare feet, but always it must be. I have seen
-you the other day in the automobile. You and your friends I saw. _Mi
-madre_ you were most wonderful! You were _linda_; _hermosa_!”
-
-The girl clasped her brown hands in a fervent gesture as she relapsed
-into Spanish by way of emphasizing her ardent admiration.
-
-“I was behind the hedge and saw you go,” she continued apologetically.
-“With me was the red book, I would to bring it back. Was it wrong to
-take it for one day? I desired it much.”
-
-“You were very welcome to it,” smiled Patsy. “We found it in the patio
-with your thank you. Did you read it?”
-
-“_Si_; but not all. It was long, with such hard words. _No comprendia_
-all. It told of the _amor_. That is the love, you know. Yet _amor_
-is the more sweet word. It is the Spanish. You must know that I am
-Spanish, but I speak the English quite well, though for a long time I
-have spoken it little.”
-
-“I should say you did speak it well!” emphasized Patsy.
-
-As it happened, Patsy was already decidedly amazed at this fact. Though
-the girl’s phraseology was a trifle clumsy at times, in the main her
-English was grammatical. To Patsy she was a bewildering combination of
-childish frankness, sturdy independence, shy humility and quaint charm.
-Above all, there hung over her that curious air of mystery which wholly
-fascinated Patsy.
-
-“You have said you desire to be to me the friend. So I shall tell you
-why I speak the English,” pursued the wood nymph in a sudden burst of
-confidence. “First, we must bury the head of this,” she pointed to the
-dead snake, “then I will show you the place under the tree where we may
-sit for a little.”
-
-“I’d love to,” eagerly responded Patsy.
-
-Completely wrapped up in the adventure, impetuous Patsy had entirely
-forgotten the passing of time. The effect her disappearance would have
-on her friends had not yet occurred to her. Her mind was centered on
-her new acquaintance, who was now busily engaged in digging a hole in
-the soft earth with a sharp stone she had picked up.
-
-“It is done,” she announced, when the crushed, ugly head of the reptile
-was hidden from view and the earth pounded down over it. “Come now. I
-will show you. Follow me and fear not. We shall not see another such
-snake, I believe.”
-
-Following her lively companion for a few yards of comparatively easy
-going, the two came to a wide-spreading palmetto under which was a
-space clear of vines and bushes. Only the short green grass grew
-luxuriantly there.
-
-“This place I love. I have myself made it free of the vines and weeds.
-Here I love to lie and look up through the trees at the sky. Sit you
-down and we will talk.”
-
-Only too willing to “talk,” Patsy obeyed with alacrity. The wood nymph
-seated herself beside Patsy, endeavoring to cover her bare feet and
-limbs with her faded brown cotton skirt. Slim hands clasped about her
-knees, she stared solemnly at the white-clad girl beside her.
-
-“I am Dolores,” she began. “That means the sadness. I have lived here
-long, but before that I lived with my father in Miami. My mother I
-never knew. I was the little baby when she died. So I went to a school
-and learned English. Now I have seventeen years, but in Miami, when I
-was of an age of twelve years, my father, who did the work every day of
-the _carpintero_, became very sick. So he died, but before he died he
-wrote the letter to his friend who came for me and brought me here. So
-never more I went to school but had always the hard work to do.”
-
-“You poor little thing!” exclaimed Patsy, her ready sympathies touched
-by the wistfulness of the girl’s tones as she related her sad little
-story. “Where do you live now, and why do you have to work so hard?”
-
-“These things I cannot tell you. It is forbidden.” The girl mournfully
-shook her head. “So it is true also that I cannot be your friend.
-But if you will come here sometimes, I will see you,” she added, her
-lovely, somber features brightening.
-
-“Of course I will, and bring my friends with me. They are dandy girls,
-ever so much nicer than I. My name is Patricia Carroll, but everyone
-calls me ‘Patsy.’ Why can’t you come to Las Golondrinas to see us?”
-
-“It is forbidden. _Never_ I can go there again. I am sorry.”
-
-The brightness faded from the stranger’s beautiful face, leaving it
-more melancholy than before.
-
-Patsy looked briefly baffled, then tried again with:
-
-“Come down to the beach with me now and meet them and my aunt.” Sudden
-remembrance of Miss Martha caused her to exclaim: “Good gracious! I
-wonder what time it is! None of my friends knows where I went. They’ll
-be terribly worried.”
-
-Patsy sprang to her feet in dismay. She wondered if she had really been
-away from the beach so very long. She was of the rueful conviction that
-she had.
-
-“I would go, but I am afraid. If she saw me she would be angry and shut
-me up for many days. So she has said.”
-
-This was even more amazing to Patsy. She longed to ask this strange
-girl all sorts of questions. Courtesy forbade her to do so. She also
-had a vague idea that it would be of no use. Fear of the person she had
-referred to as “she” had evidently tied the wood nymph’s tongue.
-
-“I’d love to have you come with me,” Patsy said warmly. “But I wouldn’t
-want you to do anything that might bring trouble upon yourself. Is it
-right that you should obey this--this person?”
-
-“No; never it is right!” The answer came in bitter, resentful tones.
-“Often I think to run away from here, never to return. Only I have the
-no place to go. I am truly the poor one. Dolores!” She made a little
-despairing gesture. “_Si_, it is the true name for me.”
-
-“Then if you feel that it is not right to obey a person who is treating
-you unjustly, don’t do it,” was Patsy’s bold counsel. “I wish you would
-tell me your trouble. Perhaps I could help you. Won’t you trust me and
-tell me about it?”
-
-“I am afraid,” was the mournful repetition. “Not afraid of you. Oh,
-never that! Already I have for you the _amor_. You are _simpatica_. I
-would to go to the sands with you now and meet your friends. I cannot.
-I will show you the way to the road. So you can walk more quickly to
-the sands. I will try to come to this place to-morrow at this time and
-wait for you.”
-
-“May I bring the girls with me?” petitioned Patsy. “My chum, Beatrice,
-saw you in the thicket the first time we came to the beach. She is
-longing to know you.”
-
-“Beatrice; it is the pretty name. She is perhaps that one with the true
-face and the brown curls. I saw her look at me that day. She is not so
-pretty as you; yet she is pretty. So, also, are those other two girls
-who look alike and still not alike.”
-
-“They are sisters; Mabel and Eleanor,” informed Patsy. “At home, away
-up North, they live next door to me. When I come here to-morrow I will
-tell you more about myself. I must go now. You haven’t said yet whether
-I might bring my chums with me to-morrow.”
-
-“I wish it,” was the brief consent. “Now I will show you the way.”
-
-It was not as far as Patsy had thought to the sandy road. Guided by
-Dolores, who knew her ground thoroughly, Patsy found jungle travel
-easy, even in her bare feet. The two girls finally came out on the road
-about an eighth of a mile above the beach.
-
-“Thank you ever so much for showing me the way.”
-
-Patsy paused in the middle of the road, her hand extended. Impulsively
-she leaned forward and lightly kissed Dolores.
-
-The vivid color in the girl’s cheeks deepened at the unexpected caress.
-A mist sprang to her glorious dark eyes. She caught Patsy’s hand in
-both her own. Bending, she touched her lips to it. “Oh, you are most
-_simpatica_!” she murmured, then turned and darted away, leaving Patsy
-standing in the middle of the white, sandy road, looking tenderly after
-the lithe, fleeing form until a tangle of green hid it entirely from
-her view.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVI
-
-NOTHING OR SOMETHING?
-
-
-Meanwhile, down on the sands, three anxious-eyed girls were holding
-counsel with an equally disturbed matron.
-
-“When did you see Patsy last?” Miss Martha was inquiring in lively
-alarm.
-
-“She was lying in the sand when I started to swim out to Mab and
-Nellie,” replied Bee. “When I got to them, Mab began splashing water on
-me and we had a busy time for a few minutes just teasing each other.
-Then I looked toward the beach. I was going to call out to Patsy to
-come on in, but she wasn’t there. I supposed, of course, she’d gone up
-to the bath house to take off her bathing suit and dress again. She had
-said she was tired.”
-
-“How long ago was that?” Miss Martha asked huskily.
-
-“An hour, I’m afraid; perhaps longer,” faltered Bee. “We’ve looked all
-along the beach and called to her. We looked in the bath house first
-before we told you, Miss Martha. We hated to frighten you. We kept
-expecting she’d come back. We thought maybe she was hiding from us just
-for fun and would pounce out on us all of a sudden.”
-
-“You should have told me at once, Beatrice.”
-
-Worry over her niece’s strange disappearance lent undue sternness to
-Miss Carroll’s voice.
-
-“I--I--am--sorry.”
-
-Bee was now on the verge of tears.
-
-“So am I,” was the grim concurrence. “At all events, Patsy must be
-found and immediately. I shall not wait for you girls to change your
-bathing suits. I shall walk back to the house at once. You are to go
-into the bath house and stay there until my brother comes for you. He
-will bring men with him who will search the woods behind the beach.”
-
-“Won’t you let me try again along the edge of jungle, Miss Martha,”
-pleaded Bee. “I won’t go far into it. I’ll just skirt it and keep
-calling out----”
-
-“Who-oo!” suddenly supplemented a clear, high voice.
-
-It had an electrical effect upon the dismayed group. Out from the
-jungle and onto the beach darted a small, bare-footed, white-clad
-figure and straight into the midst of a most relieved company.
-
-“Patricia Carroll, _where_ have you been?” demanded Miss Martha
-sternly. “No; don’t try to smooth things over by hugging me. I am
-_very_ angry with you for disobeying me.”
-
-Nevertheless, Miss Martha made only a feeble attempt to disengage
-herself from Patsy’s coaxing arms.
-
-“Now, Auntie, don’t be cross. A Patsy in hand is worth two in the
-jungle,” saucily paraphrased the unabashed culprit. “I’ve been as safe
-as safe could be. I’ve really had a wonderful time. I was so interested
-I forgot that very likely you might miss me and be a little worried.”
-
-“_A little worried!_”
-
-Miss Martha raised two plump hands in a despairing gesture.
-
-“Why, yes. I----”
-
-“Do you know how long you’ve been gone?” was the severe question. “Long
-enough to set us all nearly distracted wondering what had become of
-you. Really, Patsy, I think you’ve behaved very inconsiderately.”
-
-“I’m sorry, dearest Auntie; truly I am. I didn’t mean to be gone so
-long. I saw her and before I knew it I was following her as fast as I
-could run. She came out of the jungle after the book.”
-
-“Saw her? Do you mean our----” Mabel began excitedly.
-
-“Wood nymph,” Patsy finished triumphantly. “I surely do. I not only
-_saw_ her. I talked with her.”
-
-“I might have known it,” came disapprovingly from Miss Carroll. “I
-should have set my foot down firmly in the first place about this girl.
-I thought you too sensible by far to race off into a snake-infested
-jungle, bare-footed, at that, after this young savage. I see I was
-mistaken.”
-
-“She’s not a savage, Aunt Martha.” Patsy rallied to defense of her new
-friend. “She’s a perfect darling. She’s Spanish, but she speaks really
-good English in such a quaint, pretty way. She likes me and I like her,
-and we’re friends. We’ve shaken hands on that.”
-
-“What is her name, Patsy, and where does she live?” eagerly asked
-Eleanor.
-
-“Her name is Dolores. I don’t know where she lives,” confessed Patsy.
-“I asked her but she wouldn’t tell me. She said it was forbidden. I
-asked her to come to Las Golondrinas to see us, but she said that was
-forbidden, too. She read your book, Auntie. I told you she wasn’t
-ignorant.”
-
-“What did she say about the ‘Oriole’?” interposed Bee, before
-Miss Carroll could frame an adequate reply to Patsy’s astounding
-announcement.
-
-“I----Why, the idea! I forgot to ask her,” stammered Patsy. “I saw her
-pick up the book and run away with it. I started after her. Then I fell
-almost on that horrible snake and----”
-
-“Snake!” went up in shocked unison from four throats.
-
-“Why, yes.” Patsy colored, then grinned boyishly. “I was going to tell
-you about it in a minute. I caught my foot in some vines and pitched
-into the bushes. I stirred up a rattler. It began to sing and Dolores
-ran to me and dragged me away from the place before it had time to bite
-me. Then she killed it. It was as thick as my wrist and eight feet
-long. She said it was a diamond----”
-
-“I must say you have very peculiar ideas of safety,” interrupted her
-aunt.
-
-Despite the dry satire of her tones, Miss Martha was feeling rather
-sick over Patsy’s near disaster. In consequence, she was inclined
-toward tardy appreciation of the “young savage.”
-
-“This girl,” she continued in a dignified but decidedly mollified
-voice. “I feel that we ought to do something for her. You say she
-insists that it is forbidden her to come to Las Golondrinas. Did she
-explain why?”
-
-“No. I wanted awfully to ask her, but I felt sure that she wouldn’t
-tell me a thing. There’s a mystery connected with her. I know there is.”
-
-“Nonsense!” Miss Martha showed instant annoyance at this theory. “I
-dare say her parents have merely forbidden her to trespass upon the
-property of strangers. I have been told that these persons known down
-South as ‘poor whites’ still feel very resentful toward Northerners on
-account of the Civil War. The old folks have handed down this hatred to
-the younger generations. This girl’s parents have no doubt learned that
-we are from the North.”
-
-“But such people as these poor whites are Americans with American
-ancestors. Dolores is Spanish. Besides, her father and mother are dead.
-She said so.”
-
-Patsy went on to repeat the meager account Dolores had given of
-herself, ending with the girl’s allusion to the mysterious “she” of
-whom she appeared to stand in such lively dread.
-
-“Very unsatisfactory,” commented her aunt when Patsy had finished her
-narration. “Understand, Patsy, I am grateful to this girl for the
-service she did you. As for the girl herself----”
-
-Miss Martha’s pause was eloquent of doubt.
-
-“She’s perfectly sweet,” insisted Patsy with some warmth.
-
-“Nevertheless, you know nothing of her beyond what she has chosen
-to tell you,” firmly maintained Miss Carroll. “I don’t approve of
-her dodging about in the woods like a wild young animal. For all you
-know this ‘she’ may have been put to a great deal of uneasiness by
-the girl’s will-o’-the-wisp behavior. She may be so headstrong and
-disobedient as to require the adoption of strong measures.”
-
-“She’s not that sort of girl,” Patsy again defended. “She’s gentle and
-dear and lovable. When she smiles her face lights up just beautifully.
-Mostly, though, she’s terribly sober. Her voice is so soft and sweet.
-Only it makes one feel like crying.”
-
-“Hmm!” The ejaculation was slightly skeptical. “She seems to have
-completely turned your head, Patricia. I suppose you will give me no
-peace until I have seen her for myself. I am a fairly good judge of
-character, however. It will not take me long to decide whether she is a
-proper person for you to cultivate.”
-
-“Then come with me into the woods to-morrow,” eagerly challenged Patsy.
-“I promised to meet her there, at a certain place, and bring the girls.
-I’m not the least bit afraid you won’t like Dolores. I know that you
-will.”
-
-“What! flounder through that jungle and risk snake bite? No, indeed!
-Furthermore, I forbid you girls to do so.”
-
-“Then we can’t see her!” Patsy cried out disappointedly. “I told you
-she said she was afraid to meet us on the beach. Listen, dearest and
-bestest Auntie. As we go back over the road to the house, I’ll show
-you the place where Dolores wants us to meet her. It’s only a little
-way off the road and easy to reach. There isn’t the least bit of
-danger from snakes. There’s a kind of natural aisle between the trees
-that leads to it. Dolores brought me back over it, so I know what I’m
-talking about.”
-
-“You may point it out to me as we go back to the house,” was the
-nearest approach to consent which Miss Carroll would give. “Now all of
-you must hurry to the bath house and make up for lost time. It will be
-at least two o’clock before we reach home. I will wait for you here.
-Don’t stop to talk, but hurry.”
-
-Once in the bath house, however, the Wayfarers’ tongues wagged
-incessantly as they speedily prepared for the homeward hike.
-
-Very naturally the conversation centered on Dolores, of whom Patsy
-continued to hold forth in glowing terms.
-
-“Wait until Aunt Martha sees her,” she confidently predicted. “She
-can’t help liking our wood nymph. She was a tiny bit peeved when I
-said that I knew there was a mystery about Dolores. There is, too. I’m
-sure of it. She’s not headstrong or disobedient, but she _is_ terribly
-unhappy. The person she lives with, that horrible ‘she,’ I suppose,
-must be awfully hateful to her.”
-
-“Do you think we could find out for ourselves where she lives?” Bee
-asked earnestly. “Then we might be able to help her. She may need
-help very badly. Your father said that she might be the daughter of a
-fisherman.”
-
-“We’ll try to find out.” Patsy spoke with quick decision. “Day after
-to-morrow we’ll make Dad take us to where those fisher folks live.
-Maybe we’ll find her there. Don’t say a word about it when you meet her
-to-morrow. We’ll just keep it dark and do a little sleuthing of our
-own.”
-
-Her companions agreeing with Patsy that this would be an excellent
-plan, the quartette rapidly finished dressing, locked the door of the
-bath house behind them and joined Miss Carroll on the beach.
-
-“There’s the place where we are to meet Dolores, Auntie,” informed
-Patsy when the party reached the point on the road where she had left
-her new friend. “It’s right beyond those oaks. You can see for yourself
-that the walking is good.”
-
-“It isn’t quite so bad as I had expected,” Miss Martha grudgingly
-admitted. “Since you are so determined to introduce this girl to me, I
-may as well resign myself to taking this walk with you to-morrow.”
-
-This being as good as a promise, wily Patsy accepted it as such and
-said no more on the subject. Added discussion of it might result in a
-change of mind on her aunt’s part.
-
-Reaching the house, however, a most unpleasant surprise lay in wait
-for the party. To see Mammy Luce standing in the entrance to the patio
-was not an unusual sight. To see her stationed there, however, her
-bulky form swathed in an ancient linen duster, a shapeless black hat,
-decorated with a depressed-looking ostrich plume jammed down upon her
-gray wool, was another matter. More, in one hand was a section of a
-turkey red tablecloth, tied together at the four corners and bulging
-with her personal belongings. In the other hand she held a green
-cotton umbrella which she raised in a kind of fantastic salute as the
-Wayfarers approached the entrance.
-
-“I’se gwine away fum here, I is,” she rumbled. “I ain’t gwine stay in
-no house where sperrits come sneakin’ aroun’. I done seen one this
-mawnin’.”
-
-“What does this mean, Mammy Luce?” Miss Martha took majestic command of
-the situation. “You have no right to leave me like this without giving
-notice. Now tell me exactly what the trouble is.”
-
-“I done tell yoh a’ready, Missis. I done seen a sperrit. I wuz bakin’
-a cake, I wuz, in de kitchen. I done looks up from de oben an’ I seen
-a long, tall, ole white sperrit a-sneakin’ for de back stairs. I near
-fell daid, I did. When I come to, I wuz shakin’ like a leaf. So I jes’
-put mah traps togedder quick an’ now I’se gwine. I’se been awaitin’ to
-tell yoh an ax yoh fer mah wages.”
-
-“There are no such things as ‘spirits,’ Mammy Luce,” Miss Carroll
-informed the frightened servant. “You only thought you saw one.”
-
-Alarmed at the prospect of losing an excellent cook, Miss Martha
-proceeded to do her utmost to convince the old woman that her visitant,
-provided she really had seen an apparition, was not supernatural.
-
-“I seen it. I ain’t blind. I seen it,” Mammy Luce doggedly reiterated.
-“Yoh cain’t tell this niggah it wuzn’t no sperrit, ’cause it wuz.”
-
-“Much more likely it was one of the maids who dressed up in a sheet
-on purpose to frighten you,” was Miss Martha’s practical view of the
-matter. “Where are Celia and Emily?”
-
-“Em’ly she am upstaihs somewhar. She don’t know nuffin’ ’bout it, an’
-this am Celia’s day off. Dey am good girls an’ don’t go for to skair
-ole Mammy Luce. ’Sides, this yeah sperrit wuz ’bout seben foot high. It
-wuzn’t no _pusson_. It ain’t no use talkin’, Mis’ Carroll, ’cause I’se
-gwine ter git out fore dat sperrit gits after this niggah. It ain’t no
-fun to be daid an’ I ain’t gwine to be it.”
-
-Further argument on the part of not only Miss Martha but the girls as
-well proved futile. Mammy Luce had but one thought. That thought was
-to put distance between herself and Las Golondrinas. The substantial
-increase of wages Miss Carroll felt impelled to offer her did not
-interest the superstitious old woman.
-
-“I jes’ want what’s acomin’ to muh an’ git out,” she declared with
-finality. “I’se gwine ober yander ’bout three mile toh see mah brudder.
-He’ll hitch up his ole yaller mule an’ tote ole Luce toh the station.”
-
-“Go upstairs, Patsy, to my room and bring me my handbag. It is in the
-tray of my trunk. Here is the key.”
-
-From the white crocheted bag swinging from one arm, Miss Carroll took a
-small brass key which she handed to Patsy.
-
-As she passed through the patio and thence on upstairs, recollection of
-the curious impression she had received that morning in walking through
-the portrait gallery came back to Patsy.
-
-She had been absolutely sure at the moment that the pictured cavalier
-had moved. Mammy Luce, it seemed, was equally sure that she had seen a
-“sperrit.” The question that now obtruded itself in Patsy’s mind was,
-had she and Mammy Luce seen _nothing_, or had both of them really seen
-_something_?
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVII
-
-PUZZLING OVER THE PUZZLE
-
-
-Now minus a cook, it remained to the Wayfarers to prepare their own
-luncheon. Not stopping to bewail their cookless state, the four girls,
-under the direction of Miss Martha, attacked the task with the utmost
-good humor.
-
-Miss Carroll, however, was not so optimistically inclined. Mammy Luce’s
-sudden departure had deprived her of a skilled cook, whom she could not
-easily replace. She was thankful that the panic had not extended to the
-maids. Providentially, Celia was absent for the day. According to Mammy
-Luce, Emily was still in ignorance of the “sperrit’s” visitation. She
-had eaten her noonday meal and gone back to her upstairs work before
-Mammy Luce had seen the dread apparition.
-
-In the midst of preparations for the belated luncheon, she appeared
-in the kitchen, broom and duster in hand, her black eyes round with
-curiosity at the unusual sight which met them.
-
-In as casual a tone as she could muster, Miss Carroll informed the girl
-that Mammy Luce had left Las Golondrinas. This news appeared not to
-surprise Emily so much as had the sight of the “young ladies an’ the
-Missis aworkin’ in de kitchen.”
-
-“Huh!” was her scornful ejaculation. “I guess ole Luce done got skairt
-’bout dat ere ghos’. Carlos wuz tellin’ her ’bout it t’other day. That
-Spanish fellah in the queer duds up thar in the pitcher gallery done
-walk aroun’ this house. He go fer to say he’s seen it. He am a liar.
-They ain’t no sech things ’s ghos’es, I says, but Luce, she says they
-is. She wuz ’fraid she’d see it.”
-
-“Certainly there are no such things as ghosts, Emily,” Miss Martha made
-haste to agree. “I am glad to find you so sensible on the subject.
-Since you have mentioned it, I might as well say that it was this ghost
-idea which caused Mammy Luce to leave us.”
-
-Miss Martha diplomatically avoided making a direct explanation of
-the affair. Once Emily learned Mammy Luce had insisted that she had
-actually _seen_ a ghost, she might not remain firm in her conviction
-that there were “no sech things.”
-
-“I hope Celia has no such foolish ideas about ghosts as Mammy Luce,”
-Miss Carroll continued inquiringly.
-
-“Celie, she’s ’bout half an’ half. She says as thar might be or
-mightn’t. Only she says she ain’t gwine to git skairt ’less she sees
-one. Celie’n me, we don’t take no stock in that good-fer-nuffin’
-Carlos. He am a sorehead, he am. Ef it’s ’greeable, Mis’ Carroll, I
-reckon I ain’t sech a bad cook. Leastways, I don’ mind tryin’. Ef yoh
-likes mah cookin’ mebbe I can git mah sister t’ come an’ do mah work.”
-
-This was joyful news indeed. Needless to mention, Miss Carroll was not
-slow to take good-natured Emily at her word.
-
-“I shall be very glad to have you try, Emily,” she said. “If you can
-get along with the cooking it will save us the trouble of sending
-to Miami for another cook. Where does your sister live? Perhaps she
-wouldn’t care to come here for so short a time.”
-
-“She lives home with mah mudder, Mis’ Carroll. Jes’ a little ways from
-Miami. She am only fifteen, but she am right smaht. I done gwine t’
-write her t’night,” assured Emily, showing her white teeth in a wide
-grin.
-
-“Do so, Emily. To have your sister come here will simplify matters
-wonderfully.”
-
-Miss Martha looked her relief at this unexpected solution of the
-domestic problem.
-
-With the deft assistance of Emily, the luncheon which the Wayfarers had
-busied themselves in preparing was soon on the dining-room table. It
-consisted of bread and butter, bacon, an omelet, and a salad, composed
-of tomatoes, green sweet peppers and lettuce, with French dressing. The
-fateful cake which Mammy Luce was removing from the oven when she saw
-the “sperrit” now figured as dessert along with oranges which Patsy had
-painstakingly sliced and sugared.
-
-Previous to Emily’s disappearance, the preparation of luncheon had been
-accompanied by much talk and laughter on the part of the Wayfarers.
-Presently seated at table, they had considerably less to say. Emily’s
-revelation concerning Carlos had set them all to wondering and
-speculating.
-
-“It strikes me that this Carlos has very little good sense,” Miss
-Martha criticized the moment Emily had left the dining-room. “He should
-have known better than tell such a tale to old Mammy Luce. I shall
-speak to your father about him, Patsy.”
-
-“When we asked him about the portrait gallery he said he didn’t know a
-thing,” Patsy replied with a puzzled frown. “Do you suppose he really
-told Mammy Luce about the picture and the ghost? If he did, that proves
-he wasn’t telling us the truth. Now why should he lie to us?”
-
-“Very likely to get rid of answering your questions,” responded her
-aunt. “Undoubtedly he knew better than to tell you girls such a silly
-story. He knew you would refer to it to your father and that Robert
-would be displeased. I believe Emily, of course. As to Mammy Luce, I
-don’t know. It is exactly the sort of foolish yarn that I warned you we
-were likely to hear down South. I am sorry that it should have cost us
-our cook.”
-
-The tale of the ghostly cavalier was not disturbing Miss Carroll in the
-least. The loss of a cook was of far greater importance to her.
-
-The Wayfarers, however, were more impressed by Mammy Luce’s ghost than
-they dared allow Miss Carroll to guess. During luncheon four pairs
-of bright eyes continually exchanged significant glances. They were
-burning to talk things over among themselves.
-
-Miss Carroll’s announcement that she intended to take a nap directly
-after luncheon gave them the longed-for opportunity. Patsy’s demure
-invitation, “Come on into Bee’s and my room, Perry children,” held
-untold meaning.
-
-“Girls,” began Patsy solemnly, the instant the door of the room closed
-behind the quartette, “there’s something queer about this old house.
-There’s something queer about that picture. Carlos knows more than he
-pretended to know. I wouldn’t feel so--well, so funny about it if I
-hadn’t thought I saw that cavalier in the picture move. It gives me the
-shivers. Do you suppose there is----Oh, there simply can’t be a _ghost_
-in this house!”
-
-“Of course there isn’t,” smiled Bee. “Brace up, Patsy. You’re just
-nervous over that picture business this morning. I think perhaps Carlos
-told Mammy Luce that story just to be malicious and scare her. He
-looks like that sort of person. Maybe he dislikes us as much as his
-grandmother appeared to, and just because we live in the house that
-belonged to his former employer.”
-
-“If that’s the case, he may have told the yarn to Mammy Luce on purpose
-to get her to leave, and so inconvenience us,” suggested Eleanor. “He
-may have thought she’d leave in a hurry without telling us why she was
-going.”
-
-“Let’s begin at the beginning and see what we know,” proposed Bee.
-“First, there’s crazy old Rosita who called us thieves and said we’d
-never find something or other that Camillo, whoever he is or was, had
-hidden. Second, there’s Carlos, who turned out to be the grandson
-of Rosita, who said she was not crazy but pretended to know nothing
-else about anything here. Third, there’s Mammy Luce, who went off and
-left us because she saw, or thought she saw, a ghost. Fourth, there’s
-Emily, who said Carlos told Mammy Luce that the ghost of the cavalier
-in the picture gallery walked about this house. Fifth, there’s Patsy,
-who heard an odd noise in the gallery and saw, or thought she saw, the
-cavalier picture move. Put it all together. Does it mean something or
-nothing?”
-
-“No one except Carlos can answer that question. The whole thing, except
-Patsy’s scare, centers on him,” declared Mabel.
-
-“I’m going to have a private talk with Dad,” announced Patsy. “I’m
-going to ask him not to speak to Carlos about the ghost story, but to
-let him alone and see what happens next. If he really has a grudge
-against us he’ll be sure to do something else to bother us. We’ll be on
-the watch and in that way we’ll catch him at it. Then maybe Dad can
-make him tell what he wouldn’t tell us.”
-
-“But what about your aunt, Patsy?” conscientiously reminded Eleanor.
-“She’s going to ask your father to speak to Carlos, you know.”
-
-“I’ll see Dad first and explain things. I’ll ask him to tell Auntie,
-when she mentions Carlos to him, that he thinks it would be a good idea
-to let Carlos alone for the present and watch him. It _is_ a good idea,
-and I know Dad will agree with me. I’d say so to Auntie myself if I
-were sure she wouldn’t mind. She would, though, because she’s not in
-sympathy with us when it comes to mysteries.”
-
-“If any more queer things happen, Miss Martha will have to admit that
-there _is_ a mystery hanging over Las Golondrinas,” Bee predicted. “I
-forgot to add Dolores to the list. She’s another mystery.”
-
-“She surely is, but she doesn’t belong to the Carlos puzzle,” returned
-Patsy. “Never mind, give us time and we’ll put all the pieces of all
-the puzzles together. We’re determined to do it. That’s half the
-battle.”
-
-“We may even find the secret drawer,” supplemented Mabel hopefully.
-
-This remark was received with derisive chuckles. Her companions had
-come to regard the mythical secret drawer as a huge joke.
-
-“Laugh at me if you want to. When I find it, then it will be _my_ turn
-to laugh at _you_,” Mabel emphasized.
-
-“_When_ you do, we’ll stand in line and let you laugh at us,” jeered
-Eleanor.
-
-“I’ll remember that,” retorted her sister. “I’m going to the
-sitting-room now to patiently pursue my indefatigable investigations.
-Ahem! ‘Never despair’ is my motto.”
-
-“‘Sleep, sweetly sleep,’ is going to be mine,” yawned Eleanor. “I’m
-going to take a nap.”
-
-“I’d _like_ to go down to the orange groves.” Patsy beamed
-significantly upon Beatrice. “I’m not supposed to trail around this
-vast tract of terrestrial territory alone. If some one will kindly
-volunteer----”
-
-“I’ll take pity on you,” laughed Bee. “Come on. While we’re about it we
-might as well lug a basket along and fill it with oranges. ‘Try to be
-useful as well as ornamental.’ That’s _my_ motto.”
-
-“Mine is: ‘Be thankful for small favors,’” retaliated Patsy with an
-impish grin. “Allow me to escort you to the kitchen for the basket.
-Good-bye, Perry children. We’ll see you later.”
-
-Patsy offered her arm to Bee with an extravagant flourish and the two
-girls left the room laughing. Mabel promptly made a bee-line for the
-sitting-room, while Eleanor went to her own room for her nap.
-
-Bee and Patsy spent an enjoyable but uneventful hour in the orange
-groves, returning with their basket piled high with luscious fruit.
-Mindful of her intent to have first audience with her father on his
-return that afternoon, Patsy posted herself on a balcony overlooking
-the drive to watch for him.
-
-When, at five o’clock, he drove the car up the drive, he was met
-halfway to the house by his daughter who imperiously demanded a ride to
-the garage.
-
-Informed of all that had recently occurred and the course of action
-Patsy had laid out for him, Mr. Carroll looked decidedly grave.
-
-“I’m sorry to hear this of Carlos,” he said. “So far as work goes,
-he’s an excellent man. I’m going to adopt your suggestion, Patsy, to
-say nothing to him at present about this ghost business. I’ll explain
-to your Aunt Martha so that she’ll be satisfied to let matters stand
-as they are. Of course, if he continues to stir up trouble among the
-maids or my black boys by frightening them with ridiculous yarns about
-ghosts, then I shall feel obliged to come down on him for it.”
-
-“Have you asked him yet about either old Rosita or Dolores?”
-
-Having related to her father all she knew of both, Patsy now referred
-to them by name.
-
-“Yes.” Mr. Carroll smiled. “I described them to him this morning and
-inquired about them. He had nothing to say beyond that this Rosita was
-his grandmother and not insane. He swears that he never saw this girl
-Dolores.”
-
-“I don’t believe him,” Patsy said with a vigorous shake of her auburn
-head. “She has lived in this neighborhood several years. She told
-me so. He was brought up here. He must have seen her often. He’s a
-Spanish-speaking Mexican and she’s Spanish. He must certainly know who
-she is. Why he should deny knowing her I can’t imagine. Just the same,
-it’s something I intend to find out, if only for my own satisfaction.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVIII
-
-SOMETHING!
-
-
-“There’s to be a Venetian fête on Lake Worth on Thursday evening. Would
-you like to attend it?”
-
-Mr. Carroll made this announcement at the breakfast table one Monday
-morning to an interested group of listeners. A week had elapsed
-since the eventful morning on which Patsy had made the acquaintance
-of Dolores and the Wayfarers had returned from the beach in time to
-witness the departure of ghost-ridden Mammy Luce.
-
-On the following morning they had gone, accompanied by Miss Carroll,
-to keep tryst with their wood nymph at the spot she had designated. As
-Patsy had predicted, her chums immediately succumbed to the charm of
-the little Spanish girl.
-
-Even Miss Martha had no fault to find with her so far as behavior
-went. She found the young girl neither ill-bred nor uncouth. Instead,
-Dolores exhibited toward stately Miss Carroll a shy deference that
-would have impressed in her favor a far more critical judge.
-
-What Miss Martha did not quite like, however, was Dolores’ wistful but
-absolutely firm refusal to reveal where she lived or with whom she
-lived.
-
-“I would to answer and thus please you,” she had sadly said, lifting
-bright, brave eyes to meet squarely those of her dignified questioner.
-“I would to make you the visit to Las Golondrinas and thus be made so
-happy. I cannot. It is forbidden.”
-
-At the conclusion of the interview they had left her standing under the
-fronded green of the palmettos, hands crossed over her breast, dark
-eyes eloquent with longing. Before they parted from her, however, Patsy
-obtained her reluctant promise to come to them on the beach for a few
-minutes, at least, whenever she chanced to see the Wayfarers bathing
-there.
-
-Two mornings afterward she had kept her word. With her she had brought
-the blue book, voicing eager praise of the “very sweet story” and her
-thanks for the “_simpatica_” letter. Though the Wayfarers had pressed
-her to stay, she remained with them but a few moments. During that
-time she had cast frequent timid glances toward the jungle as though in
-lively fear of something or someone known to herself alone.
-
-Unable to withstand Patsy’s coaxing plea of: “Come again to-morrow
-morning and I’ll have another nice story book here for you,” she had
-paid them a brief call on the next day. Since that time she had not
-again appeared on the beach at their bathing hour, and the Wayfarers
-did considerable wondering as to what had become of her.
-
-The past three days having, therefore, been particularly uneventful
-beyond the healthy pleasures of outdoors, the four girls now hailed Mr.
-Carroll’s proposal with acclamation.
-
-“What is a Venetian fête?” inquired Bee. “It’s held on the water. I
-know that much. What do we have to do? Do we dress in fancy costumes?”
-
-“Only the boats dress up in fancy costumes at Venetian fêtes, Bee,”
-informed Patsy, laughing. “We wear our best bib and tucker, of course,
-and sail around in a motor launch or some kind of boat that’s all
-decorated with Chinese lanterns, colored lights, etc. Am I right, Dad?”
-
-“Right-o,” smiled Mr. Carroll. “As it happens, your fairy bark awaits
-you. I’ve engaged a power boat for the evening. Had a hard time
-getting hold of it, too. We’ll run the car down to the beach during the
-afternoon of Thursday. I’ll have the lanterns and festoonings aboard
-the launch and you girls can spend the time before dinner decorating
-it. How will that suit you?”
-
-The loud babble of appreciation that arose caused Mr. Carroll playfully
-to put his hands over his ears.
-
-“My, what a noisy crowd!” he exclaimed.
-
-“We’re only trying to express our all-around joyfulness,” Patsy
-defended. “You wouldn’t have liked it a bit if we had just said primly,
-‘How nice!’ We believe in noise and lots of it.”
-
-“So I’ve noticed,” was the pertinent retort. “Well, I’m glad you’re
-pleased. You’ll have to excuse me now. I’ve an engagement with a man at
-ten at the Ponciana. I must be hiking.”
-
-“Really, Robert, I haven’t had a chance to utter a sound since you told
-us about the fête,” came plaintively from Miss Martha, though her eyes
-twinkled. As a matter of fact she had purposely kept silent, allowing
-the Wayfarers to bubble forth their jubilation uninterrupted. “Do you
-consider this boat you’ve engaged perfectly safe? I hope you know how
-to run it.”
-
-“Oh, I sha’n’t run it. The man from whom I rented it will be on hand
-to do that. It’s absolutely safe, so don’t worry, Martha, but make up
-your mind to enjoy yourself.”
-
-With this assurance, Mr. Carroll hastily departed. After he had gone
-the others lingered at table, further to discuss the prospective
-pleasure in store for them.
-
-“I wish we could take Dolores with us,” Patsy said generously. “She’d
-love the fête. If only we could coax her to go she could wear one of my
-gowns. Maybe she’ll be at the beach this morning. If she is, I’m going
-to tease her good and hard to go with us. You wouldn’t mind, would you,
-Auntie?”
-
-“No. Invite her if you choose. I don’t doubt she would behave as well
-as the rest of you,” Miss Carroll placidly opined. “If she should
-accept (I doubt it), you must make her understand, Patsy, that she will
-have to appear in one of your gowns, not to mention pumps and hose. We
-shall probably meet a number of persons we know at Palm Beach.”
-
-“Oh, that part of it will be all right,” Patsy answered with the
-supreme confidence of one who can remove mountains. “It’s whether
-she’ll promise to go that’s bothering me.”
-
-Greatly to the disappointment of the Wayfarers, Dolores did not appear
-on the beach that morning. Nor did they see any signs of her on the
-next day or the next. Thursday morning did not bring her to the sands.
-
-On the way back to the house from the beach the party even went so far
-as to visit the spot in the jungle which Dolores had claimed as her own
-special nook. But she was not there. Though the girls called out her
-name repeatedly in their fresh young voices, only the twitter of the
-birds and the sighing of the light breeze among the leaves answered
-them. Dolores had evidently forsaken her forest haunt for a time at
-least.
-
-“Very likely that horrible ‘she’ is keeping Dolores in and making her
-work,” grumbled Patsy to Bee when the party finally returned to the
-road and started for the house. “You know, Dolores told me that she had
-had to do very hard work ever since she came here to live after her
-father died. It’s too bad Dad has been so busy lately. We can’t go to
-see those fisher folks until he can find time to go with us. I do wish
-Auntie would allow us to go there by ourselves. We could walk straight
-up the beach and never come to a bit of harm.”
-
-“Well, she won’t, so we might as well be resigned,” replied Bee
-ruefully. “She’s right, of course. My mother would feel the same about
-it; so would Mrs. Perry.”
-
-“I know it. I’m not complaining of Aunt Martha. She’s as good as gold.
-She’s been perfectly angelic about Dolores. Auntie isn’t the least tiny
-bit snobbish. She and Dad are alike in that.”
-
-Returned to the house before noon the Wayfarers lunched early. Luncheon
-over, they dutifully obeyed Miss Carroll’s mandate to retire to their
-rooms for a brief siesta before dressing for the fête. Mr. Carroll’s
-parting injunction to them that morning had been:
-
-“I’ll have the car at the door at three-thirty sharp. Be ready to hop
-into it, girls. The earlier we arrive at Palm Beach, the more time
-you’ll have before dinner to decorate the launch.”
-
-Three-thirty not only found the car on the drive at the entrance to the
-patio, it also saw Miss Martha being helped into it by her brother.
-She was followed by the Wayfarers, all looking their best in their
-smart summer finery. The four girls were in exuberant spirits as one
-after another they skipped nimbly into the automobile. The Venetian
-fête promised to be an item of pleasant variation on their program of
-enjoyment.
-
-The drive to Palm Beach was, as always, a delightful one. Coming at
-last to the famous shell road the car followed it for a short distance.
-Presently the yachting party arrived at the point on the lagoon where
-their boat was docked.
-
-Boarding it in a flutter of happy anticipation, the Wayfarers
-temporarily hid the glory of their dainty frocks under substantial
-gingham pinafores which they had purposely brought along.
-
-Then the engrossing occupation of dressing-up their boat began. What
-seemed to the girls an unlimited supply of gay Chinese lanterns and
-bright-hued bunting had been brought aboard for them to dispose as they
-fancied. Fore and aft the enthusiastic toilers strung the lanterns, and
-hung the bunting in graceful festoons, until the trim craft blossomed
-into a rainbow of color.
-
-“I can hardly wait for it to get dark!” exclaimed Mabel. “With all
-these lanterns glowing and those strings of little electric lights
-winking all colors, our boat’s going to be simply gorgeous.”
-
-“I hope we’ll have some simply gorgeous eats for dinner,” was Patsy’s
-unaesthetic but heartfelt yearning. “I’m terribly hungry. I hope, too,
-that we sha’n’t bump against a lot of people Auntie and I know the
-minute we walk into the hotel. I want to gobble my dinner in a hurry
-and get back here before dark so as to see everything that goes on.”
-
-Patsy’s fervent hopes met with a realization that pleased her not a
-little. The “eats,” which consisted in an elaborate course dinner,
-were quite “gorgeous” enough to evoke her pronounced approval. More,
-the diners encountered none they knew among the endless succession
-of people strolling in and out of the vast dining-room. Neither in
-the imposing foyer of the great hotel, on the veranda or under the
-colonnade did they spy a single familiar face. It was as though
-they had stepped into a world of easy-going strangers, all bent on
-extracting the same amount of pleasure out of life as themselves.
-
-Dinner eaten they lingered for a while on one of the hotel’s many
-verandas which overlooked magnificent gardens, aglow with fragrant
-tropical blooms.
-
-Just before dark they drove again to the lagoon and were presently
-aboard their launch, watching with eager eyes the beauty of the scene.
-Everywhere the scented dusk was pierced by winking, multi-colored
-lights. They dotted the wall of the lagoon and sprang up from hundreds
-of craft, large and small, which plied the lake’s placid waters.
-
-From off shore came the singing overtones of violins, proceeding from
-an orchestra stationed under the colonnade of a not far distant hotel.
-Now and then their ears caught the tinkle of mandolins mingled with
-care-free voices raised in song. Across the still waters occasional
-shouts rose above the harmony of sound, as gay occupants of boats
-hailed passing craft and were hailed in return.
-
-As it grew darker, rockets began to hiss skyward, lighting up the
-lagoon into greater beauty and revealing white-clad groups of
-spectators sauntering along the shell road or resting on the sea wall.
-
-With the ascent of the first rocket, boat after boat rushed off across
-the water to join the rapidly forming carnival procession which would,
-when completely formed, circle the lake. Presently came a fan-fare of
-trumpets, a burst of music from many bands playing in unison, and the
-procession started on its way around the lake, gliding along like a
-huge, glowing serpent.
-
-The Wayfarers thought it great fun to be an actual part of that
-fairy-like pageant. As the majority of the occupants of other boats
-were lifting up their voices in song, the four girls sang, too.
-Patsy’s clear, high soprano voice led off in a boat song with which her
-companions were familiar. After that they sang everything they could
-remember from “Sailing” to “Auld Lang Syne.”
-
-Later, when the boats began dropping out of line, their launch also
-left the procession and scudded farther out on the lake to a point from
-where its lively passengers could obtain a more satisfying view of the
-gorgeous spectacle.
-
-There they lingered for some time, well content to breathe in the
-flower-perfumed night air, listen to the frequent bursts of harmonious
-sound that drifted to their ears, and watch the firefly boats as they
-darted here and there on the bosom of fair Lake Worth.
-
-It was well toward eleven o’clock when the launch docked at her pier
-and the voyagers went ashore to where their automobile awaited them.
-Followed a short drive to one of the great hotels, where the party
-stopped for a late supper, then took the homeward road through the
-balmy darkness of the tropical night.
-
-Midnight came and went and one o’clock drew on before a happy but
-sleepy company made port at Las Golondrinas.
-
-“Go straight to bed, girls,” commanded Miss Martha as she marshalled
-the small procession of drowsy revelers down the echoing corridors to
-their rooms. “Don’t sit up to talk. You can do that to-morrow morning.”
-
-“I don’t want to talk. I want to sleep,” assured Eleanor with a yawn.
-“If Mab tries to talk to me after I’m in bed, I’ll rise in my might and
-put her out of the room.”
-
-“See that _you_ don’t talk to _me_,” warned Mabel. “If you do, _you_
-may find yourself wandering around in the corridor until morning.”
-
-“Glad we’re of the same mind,” giggled Eleanor. “Our chances for sleep
-seem to be good.”
-
-“Don’t worry about _me_, Aunt Martha,” Patsy declared, as, her arm in
-Bee’s, the two girls halted at the door of their room. “You won’t hear
-a sound from Bee or me after we’ve put out our light. Here’s my very
-nicest good-night kiss, dear. We’ve all had a wonderful evening and
-we’re ready to subside until morning without a murmur.”
-
-Shut in their room, Patsy and Bee beamed sleepily at each other and
-went about their preparations for bed in commendable silence, broken
-now and then by a soft exchange of remarks pertaining to the evening’s
-entertainment.
-
-Lights out shortly became the order of things with them. Almost as soon
-as their heads touched the pillow they were off and away to dreamland.
-
- * * * * *
-
-There comes sometimes to a peaceful dreamer a curious sense of
-impending danger which breaks through the curtain of slumber and
-arouses the sleep-drugged faculties to alert wakefulness.
-
-Just how long she had slept, Patsy had no definite idea. She knew
-only that she was sitting up in bed, broad awake, her horrified eyes
-staring at something tall and white which stood in the center of the
-moonlight-flooded room.
-
-She tried to cry out, but her voice was gone. She could only gaze, half
-paralyzed with terror, at the fearsome white shape. For a moment it
-remained there, a shapeless, immovable thing of dread.
-
-Suddenly, it raised a long, white-swathed arm in a menacing gesture
-toward the trembling girl in the big four-poster bed. It took one
-sliding step forward.
-
-Patsy succeeded in uttering a desperate, choking sound, intended for a
-shout. One groping hand reached over and found Bee.
-
-The dread apparition came no nearer the bed than the length of that
-one sliding step. It halted briefly, turned, then glided to the
-half-opened door and vanished into the corridor.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIX
-
-PATSY’S SCHEME
-
-
-“Bee, wake up! Oh, please wake up!”
-
-Patsy had not only regained her voice, but the use of her arms as well.
-Hands on Bee’s shoulders, she now shook her companion gently in an
-effort to waken her.
-
-“What--y-e-s,” Bee mumbled, then opened her eyes.
-
-In the moonlight she could see Patsy quite clearly as her chum sat
-crouched at her side. Blinking wonderingly up at Patsy, Bee began dimly
-to realize that something unusual must have happened.
-
-“What is it, Patsy? Are you sick?” she anxiously questioned, sitting up
-in bed with apprehensive energy.
-
-“No; I’m not sick. I’m scared. I saw it, Bee. I woke up all of a sudden
-and saw it standing in the middle of the room.”
-
-“Saw what?”
-
-“The ghost; Mammy Luce’s ‘sperrit,’” Patsy returned solemnly.
-
-“You’ve been dreaming, Patsy, dear.” Beatrice dropped a reassuring arm
-about Patsy’s shoulders.
-
-“No, Bee. I wasn’t dreaming. I was as wide awake as I am now when I
-saw it. I tell you it woke me from a sound sleep. It didn’t make a
-sound. Just the same it woke me. I wish now that I’d been brave enough
-to climb out of bed and follow it. But I wasn’t. It frightened me so I
-couldn’t move or speak.”
-
-“What was it? What did you see?”
-
-Bee had now become convinced that Patsy had not been dreaming.
-
-“I saw a figure standing right there,” Patsy pointed. “I can’t tell you
-what it looked like except that it was just an enormous white shape. I
-tried to call you, but I couldn’t. I did manage to sit up in bed. It
-raised a long, white arm and started toward me. Then I tried again and
-made a sort of sound and reached out to you. It didn’t come any nearer.
-It turned and went out the door. It must have come in that way, for the
-door stood half open. It was closed when we went to bed. You remember
-that. Now I believe that Mammy Luce saw what I saw. No wonder it
-frightened her. It frightened me, too, and I don’t believe in ghosts.”
-
-“Well,” Bee drew a long, sighing breath, “whatever you and Mammy Luce
-saw was not a _ghost_. Make up your mind to that. It was a real, live
-person _playing_ ghost. You and I, Patsy, must find out who it is and
-why the person is doing it. This ghost business has begun, all of a
-sudden. Nothing of the kind appeared when we first came here. There’s a
-motive behind it that we’ve got to discover.”
-
-“What can it be?” wondered Patsy. Her brief terror had now given place
-to curiosity. “Someone might be trying to play a practical joke on us.
-But who? Not the maids or Dad’s black boys or----” Patsy stopped. “Bee,
-do you suppose it could be--_Carlos_?” she asked with a little gasp.
-“The figure looked too tall and broad to be _him_.”
-
-“Still it might be.” Bee had avidly seized upon Patsy’s sudden
-inspiration. “Draped in a sheet, he’d look ever so much taller and
-bigger. It was he who told Mammy Luce about the ghost, you know.”
-
-“But why should Carlos want to do such a despicable thing? We’ve never
-done him an injury. Why, we never even _spoke_ to him except on that
-one morning when we tried to get him to tell us about Las Golondrinas.”
-
-“We can’t possibly know _yet_ what his object may be. We may be doing
-him a wrong by suspecting him. Just the same, he’s the only person we
-have any reason to suspect.”
-
-“He might have done it to get even with us because Mab asked him if
-Rosita was crazy. I’ve always heard that Latins are very vengeful.”
-
-Racking her agile brain for a motive, Patsy now advanced this theory.
-
-“Let’s go back a little farther,” replied Bee. “Carlos is old Rosita’s
-grandson. Rosita must hate us or she wouldn’t have called us names and
-treated us as she did. Granted, _she_ hates us. Maybe Carlos hates
-us, too. We know he doesn’t like us. He showed us that much and very
-plainly.”
-
-Bee paused, mentally trying to fit Patsy’s theory to her own.
-
-“There’s more to it than spite because Mab asked Carlos whether Rosita
-was crazy,” she continued reflectively. “Now I believe I begin to see.
-Neither Carlos nor Rosita wants us to live here. Why wouldn’t that
-account for this ghost affair? Carlos might have done it to scare us,
-believing we wouldn’t stay in a haunted house. He frightened Mammy Luce
-out of here. I’m sure if Emily or Celia had seen----”
-
-Bee’s low-toned discourse was suddenly interrupted by a wild shriek of
-mortal terror from somewhere below stairs. It floated up to the two
-girls through the half-open door, echoing and re-echoing through the
-corridors. It was followed by a succession of shrieks, each rising a
-trifle higher than the preceding one.
-
-“Come on.”
-
-Leaping out of bed, Bee snatched her kimono from a nearby chair,
-slipped her arms into it and darted, bare-footed, from the room.
-
-Patsy was only an instant behind her. As the two dashed madly along
-the corridor and downstairs, the sound of opening doors and alarmed
-voices was heard. That eerie, piercing scream could hardly have failed
-to rouse the entire household. By the time three frightened women and
-one considerably startled man had reached their doors and opened them,
-Patsy and Bee were out of sight.
-
-Straight for the servants’ quarters at the rear of the house the
-valiant runners headed. Their mad dash received a most unexpected
-check. A door suddenly opened. A figure bounced into the narrow
-hallway just in time to collide violently with the advancing duo. A new
-succession of frenzied yells rent the air, accompanied by a resounding
-thump as rescuers and rescued went down in a heap.
-
-“Oh, lawsy, lawsy!” moaned a voice. “Oh, please, Massa ghos’, I ain’t
-done nothin’.”
-
-A prostrate form swathed in a brilliant pink calico night gown writhed
-on the floor. Above it, Bee and Patsy, now on their feet, stood
-clinging to each other, speechless with laughter.
-
-“Get--up--Celia!” gasped Patsy. “We--we--aren’t--ghosts. Oh, Bee!”
-
-Patsy went off into another fit of laughter.
-
-Somewhat calmed by the sound of a familiar voice, Celia raised her
-head. In the pale light shed by a bracket lamp she now recognized
-“Missie Patsy.” Very slowly, and a trifle sheepishly, she scrambled to
-her feet.
-
-By this time Mr. Carroll, Miss Martha, Mab and Eleanor had reached the
-scene of action.
-
-“What on earth is the matter, Celia?” demanded Mr. Carroll. “Was that
-you we heard screaming? What’s happened to you?”
-
-“I done gwine t’ tell yoh in a minute.”
-
-Overcome by the awful realization that she was not suitably clothed for
-the occasion, Celia made a wild dive into her room and banged the door.
-
-Meanwhile the door of the next room had opened just enough to allow a
-chocolate-colored head to peer forth.
-
-“Celie she done see the ghos’,” explained Emily. “I jes’ lock myself in
-so I done be safe. It am gone now.”
-
-“Naturally. No self-respecting ghost could stand such a racket as I
-heard,” dryly declared Mr. Carroll. “Now tell me about this so-called
-ghost. What does Celia think she saw?”
-
-“I done _seen_ it!”
-
-Celia now reappeared, wrapped from chin to toes in the ample folds of a
-striped summer blanket. Not being the proud possessor of a kimono, she
-had chosen the blanket as most highly suitable to her present needs.
-
-“I was dreaming nice as anything’, ’bout a gran’ ball I was gittin’
-ready foah,” she blurted forth. “Suddin’ like I wakes up ’case I done
-feel suthin’ cold on my face. It war an ole cold dead hand and a
-whoppin’ big white ghos’ was bendin’ over me. I lets out a yell, ’case
-I was skairt to die an’ it jes’ laffs terrible like an’ floats right
-out the doah. I’m gwine away from heah the minute it gits daylight. I
-ain’t gwine to live no moah in this place. I reckon I know now what was
-ailin’ Mammy Luce. She done seen it, too, same’s me.”
-
-Celia having thus put two and two together and announced her departure,
-it became Miss Martha’s task to endeavor to soothe and cajole the
-badly-scared maid to reconsider her decision. Her efforts were not
-a success. Neither did the added coaxing of the Wayfarers have any
-effect. Celia remained firm in her resolve. Emily, however, was made of
-firmer stuff. She stoutly reiterated her disbelief in “ghos’es” and,
-much to Miss Martha’s relief, declared her intent to “stick it out,
-’case no ghos’ ain’t gwine to git me.”
-
-In the end, a much disturbed party, consisting of five women and one
-man, repaired to the sitting-room for a consultation.
-
-During the excitement both Beatrice and Patsy had deemed it wise to say
-nothing, while in the presence of the maids, of what Patsy herself had
-seen.
-
-As they were about to go upstairs, Patsy whispered to Bee: “Don’t say a
-word about--well, you know. I’ll tell you why, later.”
-
-“Robert,” began Miss Martha severely, when the little company had
-settled themselves in the sitting-room, “I insist now on your speaking
-to that Carlos man of yours about this ghost story he told Mammy Luce.
-Someone is evidently trying to play practical jokes upon the servants.
-I believe he knows something about it. It may be he who is doing it.”
-
-“That can’t be. Only yesterday morning Carlos asked me for two days
-off. His brother, in Miami, died and he felt it his duty to go there to
-console the family and attend the funeral. So you see he had nothing to
-do with to-night’s affair. It’s more likely one of my black boys has
-done a little ghost walking just to be funny. You notice that no one
-except the servants has been visited by apparitions.”
-
-“There is no telling how soon the rest of us may be startled half out
-of our senses,” acidly reminded Miss Martha. “You had better hire a
-guard to patrol the grounds around the house at night. He ought to be
-able to catch this scamp who has frightened the servants.”
-
-“I’ll do it,” promised Mr. Carroll. “I’ll have a plain clothes man from
-Palm Beach up here to-morrow evening. He’ll stay here, too, until we
-catch the rascal who is causing all this commotion.”
-
-“And will you speak to Carlos?” persisted Miss Carroll. “I am more
-suspicious of him than of your blacks.”
-
-“As soon as he comes back,” reassured her brother.
-
-The serious part of the discussion having come to an end, Mabel and
-Eleanor hurled a volley of eager questions at Bee and Patsy concerning
-what had happened before they reached the hallway. Patsy therewith
-proceeded to convulse her hearers with a description of Bee’s and
-her own untimely collision with Celia. Mabel giggled herself almost
-hysterical and had to be playfully shaken into sobriety by Eleanor, who
-declared that the ghost walk had gone to Mab’s head.
-
-The will to sleep overcoming their dread of living midnight visitants
-in ghostly garments, the ways and means committee adjourned in favor of
-rest. As a last word, Miss Martha cautioned the Wayfarers to lock their
-doors, which had hitherto been allowed to remain unlocked.
-
-“I don’t know whether it was exactly fair not to tell Auntie about
-my seeing the ghost,” was Patsy’s first remark to Bee after they had
-regained their room. “It’s like this, Bee. I’ve thought of a plan I’d
-like to try. I have an idea the ghost will come back and I’m going
-to be ready for it. If Auntie knew that I’d actually seen it, she’d
-probably have our bed moved into her room. Mab and Nellie’s room is
-almost across the corridor from hers, you know. We’re farther away, so
-she’d worry if she knew what we know. I’m going to tell her sometime,
-of course, but not now. Will you stand by me, Bee, and help me catch
-the ghost?”
-
-“I will,” vowed Beatrice, too much carried away by the scheme to
-reflect that she and Patsy were perhaps pitting themselves against a
-dangerous opponent. “Do you believe, Patsy, that Carlos really has gone
-away?”
-
-“No; I don’t. I think Carlos is the ghost,” calmly asserted Patsy.
-“Furthermore, he knows a way to get into this house that we don’t.
-All the men in Florida sent to guard Las Golondrinas won’t catch him.
-When Dad spoke of getting a guard, I had half a mind to speak up about
-seeing the ghost. Then I decided not to. I wanted to see what we could
-do by ourselves.”
-
-“What _are_ we going to do? You said you had a plan.”
-
-“I have. I’m going to lasso the ghost,” Patsy announced with a boyish
-grin. “I learned to handle a lariat when I was out West three years ago
-visiting Pauline Barry. One of the cowboys on her father’s ranch taught
-me the way to do it. There’s a coil of light, thin, tough rope in the
-stable. I saw it the other day. That’s going to be my lariat. I’ll
-smuggle it up here and practice with it. This is such a big room I can
-swing it easily in here.”
-
-“I don’t see how you can carry out that plan,” was Bee’s doubting
-answer. “How can you possibly know when the ghost is going to appear?
-Besides, you mayn’t have time, perhaps, or a chance to do any lassoing.”
-
-“That’s the only hard part of it. You and I will have to take turns
-sitting up and watching, Bee. Suppose we go to bed at eleven o’clock,
-as we usually do. Well, from eleven until two I’ll sit up and watch.
-From two until five it will be your turn. After five no ghost will be
-silly enough to walk. I’ll take the part of the night when it’s more
-likely to appear, because I know how to swing the lariat. If it appears
-during your watch----Let me see. I guess I’d better teach you how to
-lasso. No; that won’t do. It takes a long time to learn the trick.
-You’d be apt to miss the ghost. Then we’d never catch it.”
-
-“I think we’d both better sit up until a little after two for a few
-nights,” proposed Bee. “If we’re sleepy the next day we can take a nap.
-It was just about two this morning when the ghost came. If Carlos _is_
-the ghost, he may appear to your aunt or Mab and Nellie another time
-and not come near us. If he’s trying to scare us away from here, that’s
-what he’d be apt to do.”
-
-“He may have wandered into their rooms, too, for all we know, only they
-didn’t happen to wake up and see him,” surmised Patsy. “There’s only
-a bare chance that anything will come of it, but it will be exciting
-to try out our plan for a few nights while it’s bright moonlight. Our
-scheme wouldn’t work during the dark of the moon. Now while the moon’s
-full you can see for yourself how light it makes this room. Then, too,
-a big white ghost is an easy mark,” finished Patsy with a giggle.
-
-“All right, Patsy. I pledge myself to become a valiant ghost catcher,”
-laughed Bee. “Now let’s go bye-bye or we’ll never be able to sit up
-to-morrow night. The only thing that bothers me is not telling your
-aunt.”
-
-Bee had begun to feel a belated twinge of conscience.
-
-“It bothers me, too,” admitted Patsy, “but I’m going to stifle my
-conscience for a few days. If nothing remarkable happens, then we’ll go
-to Auntie and confess and let her scold us as much as she pleases.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XX
-
-THE WAY THE SCHEME WORKED OUT
-
-
-The next morning witnessed the departure of Celia, bag and baggage.
-Aside from that one item of interest, nothing occurred that day to
-disturb the peace of the household of Las Golondrinas. With Emily now
-installed as cook and a very good cook, at that, the loss of Celia’s
-services was not so vital, particularly as Emily’s sister, Jennie, had
-promised her services the following week.
-
-What signally worried and annoyed Miss Martha, however, was Mr.
-Carroll’s regretful announcement at dinner that evening to the effect
-that he would not be able to obtain the services of a guard for at
-least three days. An unusually large number of private details had
-rendered headquarters short of men used for such duty, he explained.
-
-“I’m sorry, Martha, but it can’t be helped,” he consoled. “I’d turn
-the job over to one of my black boys, but it wouldn’t be advisable. If
-one of them has really been playing ghost, depend upon it, the others
-know it. Result, the ghost wouldn’t appear. He’d be warned to lie
-low. I’ll stay up myself to-night and watch, if you feel in the least
-afraid. Say the word and I’ll stand guard.”
-
-“Certainly not,” promptly vetoed his sister. “I’m not _afraid_. I
-merely wish this disagreeable foolishness stopped. We will lock our
-doors and barricade them, if necessary. As for the windows opening onto
-the patio, I hardly know what to do. It’s not healthful to sleep with
-closed windows. They are so high from the floor of the patio, a ghost,
-or rather this idiotic person who is playing ghost, would find it hard
-work to climb up to them. We may as well leave them open.”
-
-“We can set rows of tinware on the inner edge of the window sills in
-such a way that a touch would upset the whole business. If anyone tries
-to climb in a window, all the pots and pans will fall into the room
-with a grand crash and wake us up,” proposed Mabel. “Besides, the ghost
-won’t linger after such a rattle and bang.”
-
-“A good idea,” approved Miss Carroll solemnly.
-
-Eleanor, Bee and Patsy received it with laughter in which Mr. Carroll
-joined.
-
-“We’d better make a raid on the kitchen and select our tinware,” said
-Eleanor gaily. “I’m proud to have such a resourceful sister. There’s
-nothing like getting ready for his ghostship.”
-
-“I don’t imagine you’ll be troubled to-night by spectral intruders,”
-Mr. Carroll said seriously. “Such a thing is hardly likely to occur two
-nights in succession.”
-
-“Emily’s not afraid, that’s certain,” declared Beatrice. “She’s going
-to sleep all alone downstairs to-night. She says she’s ‘not gwine to
-git skairt of no ghos’.’”
-
-“I told her she might sleep in that little room at the end of the
-portrait gallery, but she said she preferred her own room,” commented
-Miss Martha. “I am agreeably surprised to find her not in the least
-cowardly or superstitious. It’s fortunate for us.”
-
-“She told me she was going to lock her door and her windows and sleep
-with a club and a big bottle of ammonia beside her bed,” informed
-Patsy. “If the ghost comes she’s going to give him a warm reception.”
-
-“We all seem to be planning for the ghost’s welfare,” chuckled Mabel.
-“Poor ghost. If he knows when he’s well off he’ll stay away from here
-to-night.”
-
-Much open discussion of the spectral visitor had served to rob the idea
-of its original horror. Instead of a serious menace to tranquillity the
-ghost was rapidly becoming a joke.
-
-“We’ve done a little secret preparing of our own,” boasted Patsy in a
-whisper to Bee as they strolled out of the dining room, arms twined
-about each other’s waists.
-
-True to her determination, Patsy had slipped down to the stable that
-morning, commandeered the desired coil of rope and successfully
-smuggled it into her room. That afternoon, while Mabel and Eleanor were
-taking a walk about the grounds with Miss Carroll, the two conspirators
-locked their door and proceeded to test out the most important feature
-of their plan.
-
-Patsy found the thin, tough rope admirable for her purpose. The
-sleeping room, spacious and square, also lent itself to her plan. The
-bed being in one corner left ample room for a free casting of the
-lariat. With the quaint mahogany center table moved back against the
-wall, she had a clear field.
-
-For an hour Bee patiently allowed herself to be lassoed, moving from
-point to point, thereby to test Patsy’s skill. She soon discovered
-that her chum was an adept at the art. Wonderfully quick of movement
-and sure of aim, Patsy never failed to land the noose over her head,
-letting it drop below her shoulders and drawing it taut about her arms
-with almost incredible swiftness. At the conclusion of the practice
-both agreed that the ghost’s chances were small against “Lariat Patsy,”
-as Bee laughingly nicknamed her.
-
-Despite their numerous jests concerning the ghost, the Wayfarers’
-hearts beat a trifle faster that night as they went to their rooms.
-Earlier in the evening the kitchen had been raided and amid much
-mirthful comment a goodly supply of tin and agate ware had been
-selected and carried upstairs for window decorations.
-
-Patsy and Bee took part in these preparations merely, as Patsy confided
-to her chum, “for the looks of things.” Both considered their own
-private scheme as much more likely to bear fruit.
-
-On retiring to their room for the night the door was dutifully locked.
-For half an hour the two sat talking with the lamps burning, waiting
-for the house to grow absolutely quiet. At ten minutes to twelve, Patsy
-brought forth the lariat from its hiding place in her trunk. Next,
-both girls slipped out of their white frocks only to don dark gowns
-which would not betray their presence in the room to the nocturnal
-intruder they were planning to receive.
-
-“Shall I put out the lights?” whispered Bee.
-
-“Yes. Then stand in that space opposite the door and see if I can rope
-you,” breathed Patsy.
-
-Quickly Bee extinguished the two oil bracket lamps and a large oil
-lamp that stood on a pedestal in a corner. Into the room the moonlight
-poured whitely, lighting it fairly well except in the corners.
-
-“All ready?” softly questioned Patsy, moving back toward the end of the
-room farthest from the door.
-
-“Yes,” came the sibilant whisper.
-
-An instant and Patsy had made a successful cast.
-
-“It works splendidly,” she softly exulted. “Lets try it again.”
-
-A few more trials of her prowess and she was satisfied to recoil the
-rope and sit down on the bed beside Bee.
-
-“It’s time to unlock the door, Bee,” she murmured as the chime of
-midnight rang faintly on their ears from a tall clock at the end of the
-corridor.
-
-“All right.”
-
-Bee rose, tiptoed softly to the door and turned the key. Stealing back
-across the room she took up her position of vigilance a few feet from
-Patsy, seating herself upon a little low stool.
-
-Patsy had posted herself on the edge of her trunk, lariat coiled, ready
-to spring into action at a moments notice. Over the house now hung the
-uncanny silence of midnight, so tense in its stillness that the two
-watchers could hear each other breathe.
-
-For the first half hour neither experienced any Special discomfort. By
-the time that one o’clock had come and gone, both were beginning to
-feel the strain of sitting absolutely still in one position.
-
-The distant note of the half hour found them weary, but holding their
-ground. Patsy was worse off than Bee. Bee could relax, at least
-a little, while she had to sit on the extreme edge of her trunk,
-constantly on the alert. Should their expected visitor enter the room,
-she must act with the swiftness of lightning or all their patient
-watching would have been in vain.
-
-As she sat there it suddenly occurred to her how horrified her aunt
-would be, could she know what was going on only a few yards from where
-she slumbered so peacefully. Patsy could not resist giving a soft
-little chuckle.
-
-“What is it?” whispered Bee.
-
-“Nothing. Tell you to-morrow. I guess we can go to bed soon.”
-
-“I guess so. It’s almost two o’clock.”
-
-Silence again descended. The clock chimed three-quarters of the hour.
-Its plaintive voice ceased and the hush deepened until it seemed to
-Patsy almost too profound for endurance. And then it was broken by a
-sound, as of a door being softly opened.
-
-Bee’s heart nearly skipped a beat as she listened. Patsy felt the cold
-chills race up and down her spine. Two pairs of eyes were now fastened
-in strained attention on the door. Was it opening? Yes, it surely was;
-slowly, very slowly. It was open at last! A huge white shape stood
-poised on the threshold. It moved forward with infinite caution. It had
-halted now, exactly on the spot where Bee had lately stood while Patsy
-tried out her prowess with the lariat.
-
-Over in the corner Patsy was gathering herself together for the fateful
-cast. Up from the trunk she now shot like a steel spring. Through the
-air with a faint swishing sound the lariat sped. She pulled it taut
-to an accompaniment of the most blood-curdling shrieks she had ever
-heard. Next instant she felt herself being jerked violently forward.
-
-“Bee!” she shouted desperately. “Take hold. I’m going!”
-
-Bee sprang for the rope and missed it. Patsy shot past her across the
-room, headed for the door. Stubbornly clinging to the rope, she was
-bumped violently against the door casing, dragged through the doorway
-and on into the corridor.
-
-As she shot down the stone passageway she was dimly conscious of doors
-opening along it and voices crying out in alarm. On she went, propelled
-by that sinister, terrible force ahead. Now she had bumped around
-another corner and was entering the picture gallery. At the ends and in
-the center of it bracket lamps burned dimly.
-
-She could see the enormous white shape. It had paused in the center of
-the gallery. The relentless force had slackened. The rope now lay in
-loose coils along the gallery. And then something happened which nearly
-took Patsy’s breath.
-
-Even in that faint light she saw the picture of the cavalier move
-forward. The huge white shape leaped straight to meet it. The rope
-began to move along the floor again. Patsy braced herself and tightened
-her grasp on the end she still held. Wonder of wonders! The apparition
-had disappeared.
-
-Patsy heard an oddly familiar sound. Next she realized that the savage
-jerking of the rope had not begun again. As she stood staring at it,
-still clutching it tightly, there began again those same awful shrieks,
-mingled with snarls such as a cornered wild beast might utter.
-
-In the midst of them she was suddenly surrounded by a frantic little
-group of persons. She heard her father saying: “Thank God, she’s safe!”
-She felt consciousness slipping from her like a cloak.
-
-“The rope--hold the rope,” she mumbled, and pitched forward into a pair
-of extended arms.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXI
-
-THE GHOST
-
-
-When Patsy came to herself she was still in the picture gallery. She
-was leaning against Miss Martha, who was engaged in holding smelling
-salts to her niece’s nose. To her right clustered Bee, Mabel and
-Eleanor, anxious, horror-filled faces fixed upon her. Back of them
-stood Emily, her black eyes rolling, her chocolate-colored features
-seeming almost pale in the brighter light the lamps now gave.
-
-As Patsy’s gray eyes roved dully from one face to another, she became
-again alive to sounds which had assailed her ears at the moment when
-consciousness had briefly fled. She was still hearing those demoniac
-shrieks, mingled with savage snarls. Now there was something vaguely
-familiar about them. But what? Patsy could not think.
-
-“What--is it?” she stammered. “Where--is--it?”
-
-She had begun to realize that the horror she glimpsed in her
-companions’ faces had to do with those same shrieks rather than her own
-momentary swoon.
-
-“It’s behind this picture.”
-
-It was her father’s voice that grimly answered her. He stood at one
-side of the tarnished gilt frame, examining a rope. The rope appeared
-to spring from halfway down the frame, between the canvas and the
-frame itself. It ended in loose coils, which lay upon the floor of the
-gallery.
-
-Patsy stared at the picture, from behind which rose the tumult of
-horrid sound. For an instant she listened intently.
-
-“Why--why--I know _who_ it is! It’s old _Rosita_. I’m _sure_ that’s her
-voice.”
-
-“So the girls here think,” replied her father. “Bee tells me _you_
-lassoed her.”
-
-Mr. Carroll’s tones conveyed active disapproval of his daughter’s
-foolhardy exploit.
-
-“I--I----” began Patsy, then became silent.
-
-“Well, this is not the time to discuss that side of the affair,” her
-father continued. “There’s a secret room or cubby-hole, I don’t know
-which, behind the picture. Rosita is in there and can’t get out. You
-attended to her arms, I judge. That’s the reason for those frenzied
-howls. Undoubtedly she’s insane. You’ve had a very narrow escape.”
-
-“How could she get behind the picture without the use of her arms?”
-broke in Bee. “There’s a secret lever to the picture, of course.”
-
-“She may have been able to work it with her foot,” surmised Mr.
-Carroll. “Again, she may have purposely left the door open. There may
-be another way out of the place besides this one. She can’t take it as
-long as the rope holds. When the door closed, the rope caught. It’s
-tough, but then, the door must have closed with a good deal of force
-or it could never have shut on the rope. She’s trying to break it and
-can’t. That’s why she’s in such a rage. We’ve got her, but we must act
-quickly. I hate to leave you folks alone here. Still, I must go for
-help. I can bring half a dozen of my black boys here in twenty minutes.
-If I could be sure she’d stay as she is now until I came back----”
-
-Mr. Carroll paused, uncertain where his strongest duty lay.
-
-“I will go for the help, _señor_,” suddenly announced a soft voice.
-
-Absorbed in contemplation of the problem which confronted them, no
-one of the little company had heard the noiseless approach down the
-gallery of a black-haired, bare-footed girl. She had come within a few
-feet of the group when her musical tones fell upon their amazed ears.
-
-“_Dolores!_” exclaimed Patsy and sprang forward with extended hands.
-“How came _you_ here?”
-
-Immediately Mab, Bee and Nellie gathered around the girl with little
-astonished cries.
-
-“Soon I will tell all. Now is the hurry.”
-
-Turning to Mr. Carroll, whose fine face mirrored his astonishment at
-this sudden new addition to the night’s eventful happenings, she said
-earnestly:
-
-“I stood in the shadow and heard your speech, _señor_. There is but one
-way into the secret place. It is there.” She pointed to the picture.
-“I bid you watch it well. She is most strong. She has the madness.
-Thus her strength is greater than that of three men. If you have the
-firearm, _señor_, I entreat you, go for it, and also send these you
-love to the safe room. Should she break the rope of which you have
-spoken she will come forth from behind the picture and kill. Now I will
-go and return soon with the men. You may trust me, for I will bring
-them. Have no fear for me, for I shall be safe.”
-
-Without waiting for a response from Mr. Carroll, Dolores turned and
-darted up the gallery. An instant and she had disappeared into the
-adjoining corridor.
-
-“Dolores is right,” declared Mr. Carroll. “Martha, take our girls and
-Emily into your room. Lock the door and stay there until I come for
-you. I don’t like the idea of this child, Dolores, going off into the
-night alone, but she went before I could stop her.”
-
-“Oh, Dad, why can’t we stay here with you?” burst disappointedly from
-Patsy.
-
-Patsy had quite recovered from her momentary mishap and was now anxious
-to see the exciting affair through to the end.
-
-“That’s why.”
-
-Mr. Carroll made a stern gesture toward the picture. From behind it now
-issued a fresh succession of hair-raising screams interspersed with
-furious repetitions of the name, “Dolores.” It was evident that Rosita
-had heard Dolores’ voice and, demented though she was, recognized it.
-
-“Come with us this instant, Patsy. You have already run more than
-enough risks to-night.”
-
-Miss Martha’s intonation was such as to indicate that she, too, was yet
-to be reckoned with.
-
-“We’re in for it,” breathed Bee to Patsy as the two girls followed
-Miss Carroll, and the Perry girls out of the gallery and into the
-corridor which led to Miss Martha’s room. Emily, however, had declared
-herself as “daid sleepy” and asked permission to return to her own room
-instead of accepting the refuge of Miss Carroll’s.
-
-“I don’t care,” Patsy returned in a defiant whisper. “Our plan worked.
-We caught the ghost. And that’s not all. What about Dolores? Did
-you ever bump up against anything so amazing? Now we know who the
-mysterious ‘she’ is. No wonder poor Dolores was afraid of her.”
-
-Now arrived at Miss Carroll’s door, the chums had no time for further
-confidences. Miss Martha hustled them inside the room, hastily closed
-the door and turned the key.
-
-That worthy but highly displeased woman’s next act was to sink into an
-easy chair and in the voice of a stern judge order Bee and Patsy to
-take chairs opposite her own.
-
-“Now, Patsy, will you kindly tell me why I was not taken into your
-confidence regarding yours and Beatrice’s presumptuous plans? Do you
-realize that both of you might have been killed? What possessed you
-to do such a thing? I _know_ that you are far more to blame than
-Beatrice, even though she insisted to me that she was equally concerned
-in your scheme. She merely followed your lead.”
-
-“I’m to blame. I planned the whole thing,” Patsy frankly confessed.
-“I don’t know how much Bee has told you, but this is the story from
-beginning to end.”
-
-Without endeavoring to spare herself in the least, Patsy began with
-an account of the fearsome apparition she had seen on the previous
-night and went bravely on to the moment when she had seen old Rosita
-disappear behind the picture.
-
-“I shall never trust either of you again,” was Miss Carroll’s succinct
-condemnation when Patsy had finished.
-
-“But, Auntie----”
-
-“Don’t Auntie me,” retorted Miss Martha. “The thought of what might
-have happened to you both makes me fairly sick. I sha’n’t recover from
-the shock for a week. The best thing we can do is to pack up and go to
-Palm Beach. I’ve had enough of this house of horrors. Who knows what
-may happen next. Just listen to that!”
-
-Briefly silent, the imprisoned lunatic had again begun to send forth
-long, piercing screams. For a little, painful quiet settled down on
-the occupants of Miss Carroll’s room. At last Eleanor spoke.
-
-“I don’t believe anything else that’s bad will happen here, Miss
-Martha.”
-
-Eleanor had come nobly forward to Patsy’s aid. Standing behind Miss
-Carroll’s chair, she laid a gentle hand on the irate matron’s plump
-shoulder. Eleanor could usually be depended upon to pour oil on
-troubled waters.
-
-“Nothing further of an unpleasant nature will have _time_ to happen
-here,” was the significant response.
-
-“But nothing _bad_ has really happened,” persisted Eleanor. “Patsy
-captured the ghost, who turned out to be old Rosita. Pretty soon she’ll
-be taken away where she can’t harm anyone. If Patsy and Bee hadn’t been
-awake and on the watch to-night she might have slipped in and murdered
-them and us.”
-
-“Not with our doors locked and the keys in them,” calmly refuted Miss
-Carroll. “True, Patsy and Beatrice might have been murdered. _They_
-disobeyed me and left _their_ door _unlocked_.”
-
-This emphatic thrust had its effect on the culprits. They blushed
-deeply and looked exceedingly uncomfortable.
-
-“Well, she might have gone slipping about the house in the daytime and
-pounced upon some of us.” Mabel now rallied to the defense. “Didn’t
-Mammy Luce see her cross the kitchen and disappear up the back stairs
-right in the middle of the day? That proves she came here in the
-daytime too. By those yells we just heard you can imagine how much of
-a chance we would have had if we’d happened to meet her roaming around
-the house.”
-
-Patsy took heart at this brilliant effort on her behalf.
-
-“That’s why I saw the cavalier picture move the other day,” she said
-eagerly. “Rosita had just disappeared behind it. That’s another proof
-she came here in the daytime.”
-
-“Hmph! Here is something else I seem to have missed hearing,”
-satirically commented Miss Carroll.
-
-“I would have told you _that_, truly I would have, Auntie, but I didn’t
-want to worry you. I thought I must have been mistaken about it at the
-time and so didn’t say anything. It was the day we found the book in
-the patio and you asked me what was the matter,” Patsy explained very
-humbly.
-
-Something in the two pleading gray eyes fixed so penitently upon her,
-moved Miss Martha to relent a trifle. She considered herself a great
-deal harder-hearted than she really was.
-
-“My dear, you and Beatrice did very wrong to conceal these things and
-attempt to take matters into your own hands. You are two extremely rash
-venturesome young girls. You are altogether too fond of leaping first
-and looking afterward. I must say that----”
-
-“They’re coming!” Mabel suddenly held up her hand in a listening
-gesture.
-
-Even through the closed door the tramp of heavy footsteps and the deep
-bass of masculine voices came distinctly to the ears of the attentive
-listeners. Shut in as they were, they could glean by sound alone an
-idea of what was transpiring in the gallery.
-
-Soon, above the growing hum of voices, came a crashing, splintering
-sound, accompanied by the most ear-piercing shrieks they had yet heard.
-A babble of shouts arose, above which that high, piercing wail held
-its own. Again the tramping of feet began. The frenzied wailing grew
-even higher. The footsteps began to die out; the cries grew fainter and
-yet fainter. An almost painful silence suddenly settled down over the
-house.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXII
-
-THE RETURN OF DOLORES
-
-
-It was shattered by a gentle knock at Miss Carroll’s door. Light as was
-the rapping, it caused the occupants of the room to start nervously.
-
-“It’s Dad.”
-
-Patsy ran to the door, turned the key and opened it.
-
-It was not Mr. Carroll, however, who had rapped. Instead a shy little
-figure stood in the corridor. Patsy promptly reached out and hauled the
-newcomer into the room with two affectionate arms.
-
-“Dolores, you brave little thing!” she cried out admiringly. “You went
-all the way in the dark alone for help. Come over here, dear, and sit
-down by Auntie. You must be all tired out.”
-
-Patsy led Dolores to a deep chair beside Miss Martha and pushed her
-gently into it. The girl leaned wearily back in it. For a moment
-she sat thus, eyes closed, her long black lashes sweeping her tanned
-cheeks. Then she opened her eyes, looked straight up at Miss Martha and
-smiled.
-
-“It is the heaven,” she said solemnly.
-
-“You poor, dear child.”
-
-Miss Martha reached over and took one of the girl’s small, brown hands
-in both her own. The Wayfarers had gathered about Dolores looking down
-at her with loving, friendly faces. She was, to use her own expression,
-so “_simpatica_.” Their girlish affections went out to her.
-
-“There is much to tell,” she said, straightening up in her chair, her
-soft eyes roving from face to face.
-
-“We’d love to hear it if you aren’t too tired to tell us,” assured
-Patsy eagerly. “Where is my father, Dolores? Did he go with the men who
-took Rosita away?”
-
-“Yes. First the _señor_ showed me the way here. He gave me the message.
-He will take Rosita away in the automobile. So it may be long before he
-returns. With him went three black men and Carlos.”
-
-“Carlos!” went up the astonished cry.
-
-“Yes. You must know it was for Carlos I went as well as the others. I
-had said to him many times that Rosita was mad. He would not believe.
-It was Carlos who brought me to the house of Rosita when my father had
-the death. Rosita had always for me the hate and abused me much. Carlos
-cared not. Perhaps he had for me the hate, too. I believe it.
-
-“I have not come to the beach to have the talk with you because of
-Rosita. She watched me too much of late,” Dolores went on. “She had
-the hate for you because you came to Las Golondrinas. She was afraid I
-would see you and tell you she had the hate. She was mad, but yet most
-cunning.”
-
-“But why did she hate us, Dolores?” questioned Bee.
-
-The Wayfarers had now drawn up chairs and seated themselves in a half
-circle, facing the little Spanish girl.
-
-“Soon I will tell you. First I must tell you that two days ago Carlos
-went away. Then Rosita shut me in the cellar. Ah, I knew she had
-the wickedness planned! All the day I heard her above me, speaking,
-speaking to herself. Sometimes she laughed and shouted most loud. Then
-I could hear her words. She cried out often of Las Golondrinas and
-Eulalie and old Manuel. So I knew what was in her mind.”
-
-“Then perhaps _you_ can tell us who Camillo is or was!” exclaimed
-Patsy. “You seem to know a good deal about the Feredas.”
-
-“How knew you _his_ name?” Dolores turned startled eyes on Patsy.
-
-Briefly Patsy related the Wayfarers’ one conversation with Rosita.
-
-“I never knew.” Dolores shook her black head. “_Comprendo mucho._”
-
-Unconsciously she had dropped into Spanish.
-
-“_We_ don’t understand,” smiled Mabel.
-
-“Ah, but you shall soon know. Now I must speak again of myself. In
-the cellar I remained until this night. But on the night before this,
-Rosita went away. She came not back. This night late came Carlos home.
-I cried out to him and so he released me. He was very tired and would
-sleep. So he slept and I came here, because I had the fear that Rosita
-was hiding in the secret place to do you the harm. She had known of it
-long. Yet she knew not that I knew it, too. It was Eulalie who showed
-me, once when I came here to see her. We were friends. Rosita was the
-nurse of Eulalie in her childhood. Eulalie was _simpatica_, but she was
-most unhappy. Her grandfather was the cross, terrible old one. He, too,
-had the madness. He was _loco_.”
-
-Dolores nodded emphatic conviction of her belief that Manuel de Fereda
-had been insane.
-
-“It was the midnight when I came here,” she resumed. “I lay in the
-long grass to listen, but heard nothing. So my thought was that Rosita
-might be far away and not in the house. I wished it to be thus, for I
-had the shame to knock on the doors late and say, ‘Beware of Rosita who
-is mad.’ I knew that in the daylight I should do that and tell you all
-before harm came. So I lay still and watched the house where all was
-dark and quiet. Then I heard the voice of Rosita as I have heard it
-never before. I knew not what had come to her, but I wished to see and
-give you the help such as I could give.”
-
-“But how did you get into the house, Dolores?” questioned Patsy. “All
-the doors were locked.”
-
-“I climbed the vines, which grow upward to the small balcony on the
-western side,” Dolores said simply. “The window stood open and thus I
-came in the time to help.”
-
-“You certainly did, little wood nymph,” declared Patsy affectionately.
-“What happened when you came back with the men? We’re crazy to know.”
-
-“The _señor_ asked Carlos of the secret door. Was it the true door, or
-but the canvas? Carlos knew not. Of the door he knew from Rosita, but
-not the secret. Never had he passed through it. But I knew that it was
-the true door with strong wood behind the canvas. So the picture door
-must be shattered by blows. Thus was loosed the rope which had shut in
-the door and held Rosita fast so that she could move but a little. It
-was the surprise when I saw her wrapped in the white sheets. On the
-floor I saw her long black cloak. I understood all.”
-
-Dolores’ sweeping gesture indicated her complete comprehension of a
-situation which still baffled her audience not a little.
-
-“How did they get her out of this cubby-hole?” inquired Miss Carroll
-interestedly.
-
-Fortunately for Patsy, the arrival of Dolores had turned her aunt’s
-attention temporarily from her reckless niece’s transgressions.
-Practical Miss Martha was of the private opinion that she had been
-living through a night of adventure far stranger than fiction. The
-thought gave her an undeniable thrill.
-
-“She herself leaped out like the wild beast,” Dolores answered. “She
-sprang at Carlos, but he was ready. The wise _señor_ had said she would
-do this, because the mad turn fiercest against those they love. The
-_señor_ and the black men caught her and the _señor_ wound the rope
-round and round her body. Then they carried her down the stairs and
-held her fast, while the _señor_ went for the automobile. The _señor_
-said she must go to the police station at Miami. Carlos was sad for
-Rosita had loved him much. He had not believed she was mad.”
-
-“I don’t see how he could _help_ knowing it!” cried Patsy. “Why, we
-thought her crazy the first time we ever saw her! Mabel asked Carlos
-about her. It made him angry. I guess he knew it then, but wouldn’t
-admit it. I’m sure he must have told Rosita about us. That must have
-been one reason why she forbade you to come near us. Please tell us,
-Dolores, why she hated us. You promised you would.”
-
-“It was because of the treasure of Las Golondrinas.” Dolores lifted
-solemn eyes to Patsy.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIII
-
-THE MEMENTO
-
-
-“The _treasure_!” rose in an incredulous chorus.
-
-“Do you mean that there’s a treasure hidden somewhere about Las
-Golondrinas?” almost shouted Patsy.
-
-“It is truth,” the girl affirmed. “All his life old Manuel sought but
-never found. He had the despair, so he was most cruel to Eulalie,
-_pobrecita_. How she hated that treasure!”
-
-“Now we know what Rosita meant that day,” put in Bee. “When she said
-old Camillo had hidden it well. Was Camillo a Fereda?”
-
-“_Si; el caballero Camillo de Fereda_,” nodded Dolores, then laughed.
-“Always I think of Camillo in Spanish,” she apologized. “I would say in
-English: ‘Yes, the gentleman, Camillo de Fereda.’ He lived long long
-ago. He was _el caballero_ of the painting this night destroyed. I am
-glad he is gone. He had the wicked face. He _was_ wicked; the pirate
-and the murderer. Eulalie has told me of him.”
-
-“Then he must have been one of those Spanish buccaneers who sailed
-the seas and attacked English ships about the time when Ponce de Leon
-landed here in Florida,” declared Beatrice.
-
-“But that was away back in fifteen something or other,” objected
-Eleanor. “Las Golondrinas hasn’t been the home of the Feredas nearly
-so long as that. In those days there was nothing here but swamps and
-wilderness. Do you happen to know just how old this house is, Dolores?”
-
-“Eulalie has said that many, many Feredas have lived here,” Dolores
-replied. “All knew of the treasure but could not find. It was the
-secret which passed from the father to the son. Manuel knew it, but
-he would never tell Eulalie because she was not the son. She knew
-only from him that there was the treasure for which old Manuel always
-searched. She had not the belief in it.”
-
-“Then how did Rosita come to learn of it?” interrupted Bee quickly.
-
-“I heard her tell Carlos that long ago she spied upon Manuel. Once,
-while he wandered in the woods looking for the treasure, she followed
-him all the day. He lay down under the trees to sleep. While he slept
-she crept to him and took from his pocket the letter and the small
-paper. What was written on the small paper she could not understand,
-for it was not the Spanish. The letter was the Spanish. For the many
-long words she could not read it well. So she put them again in
-Manuel’s pocket. But she swore to Carlos that old Camillo wrote the
-letter and that he wrote of the treasure which he had hidden.”
-
-“Did you tell Eulalie what Rosita said?” pursued Bee with lawyer-like
-persistence.
-
-“I dared not. I had the fear she might question Manuel. Then he would
-have had the great anger against Rosita. Then Rosita would have killed
-me. When Eulalie was the small child, Rosita was the nurse and lived
-in Las Golondrinas. It was then that she followed Manuel and read the
-letter. When Eulalie had the age of fourteen years, Manuel sent Rosita
-away to the cottage to live. Soon after I came here.”
-
-“Rosita couldn’t have liked Eulalie very well. When we asked her about
-Eulalie that day she raved and shrieked ‘_ingrata_’ and goodness knows
-what else,” related Mabel. “I can understand enough Spanish to know
-that she was down on Eulalie.”
-
-“She had the anger because Eulalie wished Las Golondrinas to be sold.
-While Manuel lived Rosita dared not look here for the treasure. When
-he died she was glad. She wished Eulalie to let her come here again to
-live. Eulalie was weary of this place of sorrow. She cared not that
-she was the Fereda. So she sold Las Golondrinas to the _señor_, your
-father.”
-
-Dolores inclined her head toward Patsy.
-
-“Now I begin to see why Rosita had no use for us,” smiled Patsy. “She
-must have had a fine time hunting the treasure before we came down here
-and spoiled sport.”
-
-“It is truth,” concurred Dolores. “All the day and often in the night
-she searched everywhere. She had the keys to this house. She came here
-much while it was empty. It was then, I believe, that the greatest
-madness fell upon her. She knew nothing that Eulalie had sold Las
-Golondrinas to the _señor_ until he came here to live. I remember how
-angry she was. Still she watched and went to the house when the _señor_
-was not there.”
-
-“I have no doubt she was tucked away somewhere in the grounds watching
-when we arrived,” frowned Miss Martha. “We have had a narrow escape.”
-
-“She saw you,” instantly affirmed Dolores. “It was the surprise. She
-thought the _señor_ would live here alone. Then fell the rain and for
-two days she went not out of the cottage. I, also, went not out until
-the sunshine returned. Then I ran away into the woods. So you came to
-the cottage and I never knew.”
-
-“It’s strange she never said a word to you about it,” mused Beatrice.
-
-“Ah, no! She spoke to me but little; only the harsh words. It was to
-Carlos she would talk, but not before me. Now I understand why she was
-in the great rage when I returned to the cottage on that morning when
-you had been there. You had spoken of these Feredas and Eulalie. She
-was afraid you had come here to hunt for the treasure. She wished to
-frighten you away.”
-
-“Our theory was not as wild as it might have been, Patsy,” smiled Bee.
-
-“I suppose Carlos was hunting for the treasure, too, and so helped
-along this lunatic’s plans to play ghost. She could never have thought
-out the idea herself. I shall have Carlos arrested and locked up as a
-dangerous character,” announced Miss Carroll with stern determination.
-
-“Carlos has no belief in the treasure.” Dolores paused uncertainly.
-“I will tell you the truth. Carlos will not return. He will slip away
-from the _señor_ at Miami. So he called out to me in Spanish when he
-went away with Rosita. He had no plans with Rosita to play the ghost.
-She only had that thought.”
-
-“Then why did he allow her to do so?” asked Miss Carroll severely. “He
-knew it. He warned our cook to beware of a ghost that walked here.”
-
-“Carlos hates the _Americanos_. Once he was to marry the Mexican
-_señorita_. She left him and married the _Americano_. Now he hates them
-all. Thus he was glad to have Rosita make the trouble. He believed it
-was for the sake of him more than the treasure. She told him this. She
-was mad, but cunning. She deceived him. He is most stupid and easy to
-deceive. He did not believe she would harm anyone. He thought she had
-the malice; not the madness. Now he knows, because she sprang at him.”
-
-“Well, I must say it’s the most preposterous affair all around that
-I’ve ever heard of,” sharply opined Miss Carroll. “To come to Florida
-for a vacation and be picked out as victims by a vengeful Mexican and a
-lunatic! It’s simply appalling.”
-
-“Oh, look!”
-
-Patsy had risen and was pointing toward a window.
-
-“What is it?” burst simultaneously from Bee, Mabel and Eleanor. Miss
-Martha was sitting bolt upright in her chair as though preparing to
-face the worst.
-
-Dolores, alone, did not stir. She lay back in her chair, eyes closed.
-Her strenuous watch on the house, her brave run for help through the
-darkness and the fact that she had never before in her life talked
-so much at one time, had combined to reduce her to a state of utter
-exhaustion. All in a minute she had dropped fast asleep. She had not
-even heard Patsy cry out.
-
-“Why--did you ever! See! It’s _daylight_!”
-
-Patsy’s voice had risen to a little wondering squeal on the last word.
-
-Daylight it surely was. Through the windows the soft rays of dawn were
-stealing, heralding the fact that day was breaking upon a company of
-persons who had been too much occupied to notice the flight of time.
-
-“Look at that child!” Miss Martha dramatically indicated the slumbering
-wood nymph. “I should have put her to bed the instant she stepped
-into this room, instead of allowing her to tell that long story. I am
-ashamed of my lack of judgment.”
-
-“She wanted to tell it, and we wanted to hear it,” Patsy said. “It’s
-been a weird night, hasn’t it?”
-
-“Weird, yes; altogether too weird. Go to bed every one of you, and
-_lock your doors_!”
-
-“Where will Dolores sleep, Auntie? She can’t go home. She hasn’t any
-home now. She’ll have to stay with us. Won’t that be fine?” exulted
-Patsy.
-
-“Dolores will remain here with me. We’ll discuss her future later. This
-is certainly not the time to discuss it. Good night, or, rather, good
-morning. Off to bed, all of you.”
-
-Miss Martha fairly shooed her flock out of the room. They departed
-with laughter, their cheerful voices echoing through a corridor lately
-filled with sounds of an entirely different nature.
-
-“Enter without fear, my dear Miss Forbes,” salaamed Patsy, bowing Bee
-into the room in which had been staged the first act of the night’s
-drama. “The ghost is forever laid.”
-
-Laughing, Bee stepped over the threshold. The laugh suddenly trailed
-into a gasp. At the precise spot where Patsy had lassoed Rosita lay a
-sinister memento of the mad “ghost.” It was a long, sharp, two-edged
-knife.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIV
-
-THE SECRET DRAWER
-
-
-Instead of a one o’clock luncheon that day the Wayfarers sat down to
-a one o’clock breakfast. It was noon before they awoke from the sound
-sleep they were so much in need of after their all-night vigil.
-
-That day there was a new face at the breakfast table. It was a vividly
-beautiful face lighted by a pair of soulful, dark eyes. Dolores, the
-wood nymph, had been transformed over night into Dolores, the young
-woman. Dressed in one of Patsy’s white morning frocks, her heavy black
-hair rolled into a graceful knot at the nape of her neck, Dolores bore
-small resemblance to the ragged, bare-footed waif of the night before.
-
-Now those small bare feet which had sped so swiftly through the
-darkness for help were for the first time in years covered by
-slippers and stockings. Though Dolores was too shy to say it this
-one particular feature of the transformation seemed to her the most
-wonderful of all. “To go always with the feet bare” had been her
-greatest cross.
-
-Seated between Bee and Patsy at table her gaze wandered questioningly
-from one to another of the Wayfarers, as though unable to credit the
-evidence of her own eyes. She could hardly believe that she was in the
-midst of reality. It all seemed like a dear dream from which she would
-soon awaken, only to find again the old life of poverty, harsh words
-and blows.
-
-Naturally, the Wayfarers had a good deal to say. They were still
-brimming over with the excitement of the night’s events, the final
-touch of melodrama having been furnished by the finding of the knife on
-the floor of Patsy’s and Bee’s room.
-
-Recovered from the momentary shock sight of the murderous weapon had
-given them, the finders had agreed that there was no use in exhibiting
-it to the others just then and stirring up fresh excitement.
-
-Patsy reserved it as a breakfast surprise. She created not a little
-commotion when she produced it at the table for her companions’
-inspection, coolly announcing that Rosita had left her a keepsake.
-The weapon went the round of the table to the tune of much horrified
-exclamation, as its formidable, razor-like double edge was shudderingly
-noted.
-
-“I can’t imagine why your father hasn’t returned, Patsy,” remarked Miss
-Carroll for the fifth time since they had sat down to breakfast. “I am
-beginning to feel very uneasy over his continued absence.”
-
-“I don’t believe we’ll see him until evening,” returned Patsy. “It must
-have been daylight before he got through with Rosita’s case. He had two
-business engagements in Miami to-day. Don’t you remember? He mentioned
-them to us at dinner last night?”
-
-“I had forgotten that,” admitted Miss Carroll. “It’s hardly to be
-wondered at. I wish he would come home. I am all at sea about what we
-ought to do. Now that this horrible lunatic has been removed from here
-and her villainous grandson has decamped, it is just possible we may
-have a little peace and quiet. Do you think this rascal Carlos meant
-what he said to you, Dolores?”
-
-“Yes, Señora Martha. He will never return,” Dolores assured. “He will
-sell the cottage which old Manuel gave to Rosita and never come here
-more. I am glad. Now I shall go myself soon to Miami and find the work
-to do. I am strong and not afraid of the work.”
-
-“My dear child, you will do nothing of the sort,” contradicted Miss
-Carroll. “You will stay with us for the present.”
-
-“And when we go north, Dolores, you’re going too,” broke in Patsy. “You
-haven’t any folks now, except us, so you’ve just got to be good and
-hang around with the crowd.”
-
-“It is too much,” Dolores protested. “I will stay for a little because
-you wish it. I wish it, also,” she added with shy honesty. “Soon I must
-go away. I am not the burden.”
-
-“Of course you aren’t. You don’t look a bit like a burden,” gaily
-retorted Patsy. “Let’s not talk about your going away. Let’s talk about
-the treasure of Las Golondrinas. Do you suppose there really _is_ a
-treasure?”
-
-“_Quien sabe?_” shrugged Dolores.
-
-“That means literally, ‘Who knows?’” translated Mabel, smiling at
-Dolores. “But _you_ really mean, ‘I doubt it.’”
-
-“I have little belief,” confessed Dolores. “Many Feredas have searched
-but never found. Perhaps, then, there is none to find.”
-
-“I wish we knew something of its history,” sighed Bee. “What do you
-suppose old Manuel did with the letter and the paper that Rosita took
-from him while he was asleep?”
-
-“Very likely he put them in the secret drawer,” chuckled Eleanor,
-casting a teasing glance at Mabel.
-
-“Well, he might have,” stoutly defended Mabel. “I guess I’ll have
-another try at the old desk this afternoon. If there’s a treasure in
-this house we must do our best to find it.”
-
-“You girls had best stay quietly indoors to-day.” admonished Miss
-Carroll. “None of you are half rested from last night.”
-
-“Señora Martha, I have the wish to go to the cottage,” requested
-Dolores timidly. “I have there the few things which were my father’s. I
-desire them. When I have them I will go to that cottage no more.”
-
-“My dear, you must feel that you are free to go and come as you
-choose,” returned Miss Carroll, “except that I would prefer, while you
-are here with us, that you let me know beforehand where you intend to
-go. I wish you to feel that I have the same interest in you that I have
-in Patsy’s friends, Bee, Mabel and Eleanor. If you were to go away
-without telling anyone where you were going we would be uneasy until
-you returned.”
-
-“I _desire_ to give the obedience to you, Señora Martha! It will be
-most beautiful,” Dolores made fervent response.
-
-“I wish others felt the same about it,” commented Miss Carroll
-pointedly, yet with a smile, as she rose from the table.
-
-Patsy merely laughed, though she colored slightly at the roundabout
-rebuke.
-
-“It’s too late for regrets, Auntie,” she declared. “I promise to do
-better in future. May Bee and I go to the cottage with Dolores?”
-
-Miss Martha, having demurred a little, finally gave a reluctant
-consent. Patsy and Bee ran upstairs for their hats. Having gone hatless
-for years, Dolores had declined Patsy’s offer of one of her own.
-
-Presently the three girls left the house and took the path to the
-orange groves through which they must pass in order to reach old
-Rosita’s cottage.
-
-Coming at last to the cottage, they saw that the door stood wide open.
-The two Wayfarers experienced a sense of dread as they followed Dolores
-across the stone threshold into a big, cheerless room which occupied
-the greater part of the ground floor. Both had an uncomfortable
-feeling that Rosita might suddenly appear and pounce upon them. They
-were surprised to find extreme neatness where they had expected to
-view disorder. The floor was immaculately clean and the few pieces of
-old-fashioned furniture stood stiffly in place.
-
-“I had an idea we’d find everything upside down,” Patsy remarked.
-“Rosita was a good housekeeper even if she was crazy.”
-
-“Ah, but it was I who must do the work,” sighed Dolores. “All must
-be clean save the windows. These Rosita purposely kept dark with the
-cobwebs so that strangers might not see into the room. Of herself she
-did nothing, yet she made me to do all. She was indeed mad for long.
-Always she feared strangers, but none ever came. It is past. I am glad.
-Wait here for me. I must go up the stairs to the place where I slept.
-There I have the few things I wish to take away.”
-
-With this Dolores disappeared up a short staircase which opened into
-the rear wall of the room and led to a loft. As there was nothing in
-the ugly bare-walled room to attract their interest, Bee and Patsy
-presently sat down on a wooden bench outside the house to await
-Dolores’ return.
-
-She soon appeared, carrying an antiquated canvas telescope which she
-proudly assured them had belonged to her father.
-
-“When we return to Las Golondrinas I will show you the picture of my
-father,” she promised. “He was the good man and loved me much. Now we
-shall leave this place. I have the hope never to enter it again.”
-
-Dolores raised her hand in a solemn gesture toward the sky.
-
-“The God in the Heaven heard me pray,” she said, then reverently
-crossed herself. “He has given me the freedom.”
-
-The trio were rather silent on the walk back to Las Golondrinas.
-Dolores’ thoughts were upon the great change that had come to her.
-Patsy and Bee had been deeply impressed by her little act of reverence
-and divine faith toward the Almighty. In consequence, they, too, were
-absorbed in thought.
-
-Accompanying Dolores to the room which Miss Martha had that day given
-the little girl for her own, they watched her unpack the satchel and
-showed kindly interest in the few keepsakes she possessed, which had
-belonged to her father. Viewing the faded photograph of the latter,
-they could trace in Dolores’ beautiful face a distinct likeness to the
-handsome photographed features.
-
-“Old Rosita could teach us a lesson in neatness,” Patsy said to Bee as
-they entered their own room. “Emily was so busy, I told her we’d fix up
-our room to-day. We might as well move the table back to the center of
-the room. The ghost won’t walk ever again.”
-
-“Come on, then. I’ll help you.”
-
-Tossing her hat on the bed, Bee crossed the room and took hold with
-both hands of one end of the heavy mahogany center table. As she stood
-waiting for Patsy to come to her, her hands played absently along the
-table’s edge.
-
-“Coming in a minute,” called Patsy, who had stopped to retie her white
-buckskin Oxford.
-
-“Oh!”
-
-Bee gave a sharp little scream. She had felt the wood move under her
-straying fingers. Something suddenly shot out from the table end. Sheer
-surprise caused her to take a stumbling backward step.
-
-“Patsy, look here!” she cried out shrilly.
-
-Instantly Patsy left off tying her shoelace and obeyed the call in a
-hurry. What she saw was sufficiently amazing to warrant her haste.
-
-While Mabel had spent long hours of patient search for a secret drawer
-in the old desk, Bee had come upon one unawares.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXV
-
-WHAT THE SECRET DRAWER HELD
-
-
-The secret drawer, which Bee’s straying fingers had unwittingly
-released from its hiding place, projected about six inches from the
-table end. It measured perhaps eight inches across and two in depth.
-When closed its front formed one of the carved oblong designs which
-repeated itself at intervals of two inches apart on the overhanging
-mahogany strips constituting the two ends of the table. The oblong
-which masked the secret drawer was the last to the left on the end
-on which Bee had taken hold when about to move the table back to its
-original place.
-
-These facts relative to the secret drawer were, for the time being,
-lost on the two girls. Heads together, they were wonderingly examining
-a square, thin little book, bound in stained sheepskin, which Bee had
-snatched from the drawer.
-
-“‘The Private and Personal Diary of one Sir John Holden, Passenger on
-His Majesty’s Ship _Dragon_,’” Bee was reading aloud from the book’s
-first page. The words were inscribed in faded ink in a fine running
-hand.
-
-“Why, this is a _real_ diary!” she exclaimed. “It was kept by an
-_Englishman_! It must be awfully old!”
-
-“Turn over to the next page,” eagerly commanded Patsy, “and let’s see
-what it’s all about.”
-
-Holding the book in both hands, Bee let go of it with her right and
-started to turn the first leaf. As she did so a folded paper slid from
-the back of the book to the floor.
-
-Patsy made a quick dive for it and picked it up with: “It’s a letter, I
-guess. Shall we look at it first or go on with the diary?”
-
-“Let’s not look at either, just yet. Let’s call the folks in here and
-read the diary and the letter when we’re all together,” proposed Bee
-generously. “It will be more fun. They’ll be awfully surprised to see
-the secret drawer; Mab especially.”
-
-“All right,” amiably agreed Patsy. “You go for Mab, Eleanor and
-Dolores. I’ll see if Auntie has had her nap and is awake. If she’s
-sleeping I won’t disturb her. We may find nothing very interesting,
-after all, in this old diary. Anyhow we can show it to her afterward.”
-
-Carefully laying letter and diary on the table from which both had
-emanated, the two Wayfarers sped from the room on their respective
-errands.
-
-Patsy returned first and without her aunt. Finding Miss Martha sleeping
-peacefully, she had foreborne to disturb her.
-
-When Beatrice presently appeared in company with the three others, they
-found Patsy busily examining the secret drawer which still stood open.
-
-“You were on the wrong trail, Mab,” she laughingly greeted. “Bee beat
-you to it after all.”
-
-“So I hear. Lets see your wonderful find.”
-
-The newcomers crowded about the drawer, exclaiming over it, girl
-fashion. They were also duly impressed by the sheepskin book and the
-letter which, Patsy informed them, had been tucked away in the drawer.
-Mabel, however, was more interested in the drawer itself.
-
-“It takes up exactly the same amount of space as one of those oblongs,”
-she cried out, as her observing eyes traveled the length of the
-table end. Having spent so much time on the antiquated desk she was
-naturally much interested in the mechanics of the secret drawer Bee had
-discovered.
-
-“Never mind the drawer now, Mab. You can play with it later. We’ll
-leave it open. If we were to shut it, very likely we couldn’t open it
-again.”
-
-This from Patsy, who was impatiently longing to start a reading of the
-old diary.
-
-“Be seated, ladies,” she merrily ordered. “Miss Patricia Carroll has
-kindly consented to read you a few interesting excerpts from the diary
-of one Sir John Holden. Goodness knows who he was. We’ll know more
-about him after we’ve read what he’s written about himself.”
-
-“I thought you told us you two hadn’t read the diary,” playfully
-accused Eleanor. “You seem to know all about it.”
-
-“We read only the first page,” Bee explained. “We didn’t go on with it
-because we wanted you girls to be in on it, too. There’s nothing stingy
-about us.”
-
-“So I observe. We are nothing if not appreciative.”
-
-“This was the room of old Manuel,” irrelevantly remarked Dolores. She
-had been silently listening to the girls’ lively chatter, her great
-dark eyes roving curiously about the spacious room.
-
-“It _was_!” Bee exclaimed. “That’s interesting to know. It explains why
-Rosita paid us those two midnight visits. She may have thought Manuel
-de Fereda had found the treasure and tucked it away in his room. Are
-you sure this was _his_ room, Dolores?”
-
-“_Si._” Dolores wagged an emphatic head. “Once Eulalie showed it to me.
-We came only to the door. Still I remember. It was truly his room.”
-
-“Then Manuel must have put this book in the drawer,” declared Patsy.
-“Well, let’s find out what an English passenger on ‘His Majesty’s Ship
-_Dragon_’ had to do with the Feredas.”
-
-Her companions having drawn up chairs and seated themselves in a half
-circle, Patsy picked up the little sheepskin book and eagerly turned to
-the second page.
-
-“‘August the fifth,’” she began, then gave a little amazed gasp.
-“Girls,” she said in awed tones, “this date is ‘_sixteen_ hundred and
-eighteen!’”
-
-A murmur of surprise ascended at this announcement.
-
-“Go on, Patsy,” urged Bee. “What happened on August the fifth, sixteen
-hundred and eighteen?”
-
-“‘One hour after sunrise,’” Patsy resumed, “‘we weighed anchor and
-blessed by a fair wind we set sail from the port of Southampton, bound
-for Virginia, His Most Gracious Majesty’s colony in the New World,
-which, by the aid and mercy of God, we hope to reach in safety and
-before many weeks have elapsed. It is now evening and the good wind
-still continues to fill the _Dragon’s_ sails. I shall retire at once as
-the events of the day have been somewhat fatiguing.’”
-
-“That’s all for August the fifth,” she said. “The next is August the
-tenth, so it’s really a journal instead of a diary.”
-
-“This John Holden probably intended to keep a diary and then didn’t,”
-surmised Bee.
-
-“How funny!” ejaculated Patsy. “That’s almost exactly what he’s
-written. Listen:
-
-“‘My original intention consisted in the resolve to chronicle
-faithfully the events of each day. I am deeply regretful that divers
-matters have completely engaged my attention which have thus caused
-it to be impossible for me to perform this duty which I laid upon
-myself. Thus far the Almighty hath indeed favored us. We were for a
-day becalmed, but since that time we have encountered exceptionally
-favoring winds, which have steadily furthered us on our course. If
-Providence wills a continuation of this remarkably fine weather we
-shall accomplish the voyage sooner, perhaps, than we had the temerity
-to hope.’”
-
-“He certainly used a lot of words to express himself,” smiled Eleanor.
-
-“Long words and lots of them were the fashion in those days,” commented
-Bee. “Go on, Patsy.”
-
-“‘August the twelfth. The fine weather still prevails. We are inspired
-to believe that God is with us. Among the hundred and ten males on
-board our good ship, not one now suffereth the slightest indisposition.
-During the first three days of the voyage a small number were afflicted
-with the malady of seasickness, which is grievously unpleasant in
-that it is attended by extreme nauseation of the stomach. Fortunately
-this annoying complaint is always of short duration. All those thus
-distressed have recovered and appear to be in better health than ever.
-I trust that this felicitous state of affairs may continue.
-
-“‘August the twentieth: This day a sad accident occurred. By some dire
-mischance one of our crew, a faithful fellow but one whose clumsiness
-I have frequently noted, fell overboard. Immediately our captain
-bestirred himself to accomplish his rescue, but in vain. Being a poor
-swimmer, the unfortunate fellow was unable to sustain himself above
-the waves until succor came, and thus perished in the sea before our
-very eyes. I trust that this distressing event is not a forerunner of
-greater disaster. The crew, who are inclined somewhat toward silly
-superstition, appear to regard it as an ill omen.
-
-“‘August the twenty-ninth: Our favoring winds have ceased to blow. This
-day we have made no progress worth recording. As I gazed out over the
-vast expanse of ocean this evening, during the setting of the sun, I
-was reminded of the words of the beloved Apostle John: “And I saw a sea
-of glass mingled with fire.” We should give thanks devoutly, inasmuch
-as while we are thus irritatingly becalmed, such a condition is to be
-preferred to foul weather and heavy seas.
-
-“‘September the fourth: After five days of such feeble progress
-as maketh the heart sick, we are speeding forward once more under
-billowing sails. On board ship all are in excellent spirits at this
-welcome dispensation of divine Providence. We now entertain high hopes
-of reaching our destination ere the coming of the dreaded equinoctial
-gales which are well able to send the stoutest ship to the bottom of
-the sea.
-
-“‘I fear these tempests far more than the possibility that we may be
-attacked by the Spanish. We are, I believe, well prepared to meet the
-Spanish villains and worst them, should they appear against us. We have
-on board the _Dragon_ no mean defense in the way of cannon, powder,
-some hundred rounds of great artillery and divers small armament. All
-this, of course, being vitally necessary, inasmuch as among us we are
-possessed of enough in the way of gold, silver and precious stones to
-excite the greed of these inhuman cut-throats should they get wind of
-our coming.’”
-
-“This is getting wildly interesting!” exclaimed Bee. “At last we
-have with us a _treasure_. I believe it must be the treasure of Las
-Golondrinas, else why would old Manuel have kept this diary hidden
-away?”
-
-“But this ship, the _Dragon_, was bound for Virginia, not Florida,”
-reminded Mabel. “I don’t see much connection between this John Holden’s
-diary and Las Golondrinas. Besides, there couldn’t have been such a
-place as Las Golondrinas at the time he made this voyage.”
-
-“Stop interrupting me and maybe we’ll find out something more about
-things,” laughingly rebuked Patsy. “The next entry is as follows:
-
-“‘September the fifteenth: Until yesterday all progressed with such
-remarkable serenity that I had nothing of import to inscribe upon the
-pages of this book. Last evening at sunset we encountered a small
-Spanish galleon which villainously opened fire upon us, killing two
-of our crew and slightly wounding four others. Our master gunner
-immediately retaliated with a fierceness of fire which presently caused
-our enemy to abandon the attack and sail away with all speed. When the
-retreating galleon had become but a distant speck on the wide sea we
-gathered on deck and offered our profound thanks to God for his mercy
-in thus preserving us from our enemies. May He continue thus to bestow
-his favor upon us.
-
-“‘September the sixteenth: This day we committed to the depths of
-the ocean the bodies of the two poor fellows, slain by the dastardly
-Spanish. We buried them with such honors and reverence as befitted
-the brave death which they had suffered. I have hopes that those who
-received wounds will quickly recover. Our hearts are exceedingly heavy
-over the loss of two excellent men, both having ever been sober,
-industrious, God-fearing fellows.
-
-“‘September the twentieth: According to the reckonings, which, for
-my own satisfaction, I have computed privately with the utmost
-carefulness, we are still many hundred miles from land. Since morning
-the wind hath risen to a considerable strength and velocity. The sky
-to-night presents a lowering aspect, thus causing us to entertain dark
-misgivings. The sea is becoming tumultuous and the height of the waves
-is greater than at any time since we embarked upon this voyage. I fear
-that we shall yet taste the fury of the equinoctial gales. I believe
-to-day’s change but heralds the commencement of this trial. We must be
-of stout heart and ready arm, placing our trust in the Almighty who
-hath thus far so abundantly safeguarded us.
-
-“‘September the thirtieth: We have fallen upon evil days. I sadly
-mistrust that it will be long ere our eyes behold the goodly colony of
-Virginia. On the night of September the twenty-first the storm, which I
-had rightly predicted, burst fiercely upon us. Against the fury of the
-blast and the seas which rose mountain-high to engulf us, the _Dragon_
-prevailed only by a miracle wrought by Providence.
-
-“‘For three days we labored in the teeth of the tempest, which ripped
-bare certain of our masts and flung us far off our course. Since then
-the wind hath continued to blow with exceeding roughness, and the waves
-yet remain of unpleasant height. Day upon day hath seen our ship tossed
-about like a cork on the waters.
-
-“‘My private computations lead me to entertain the dismaying
-apprehension that we must be very far south of Virginia. Ere long I
-fear we shall see the coast of that debatable land, Florida, which
-harboreth the inhuman Spaniard. Should this misfortune encompass us we
-shall find ourselves hard put to escape falling into their clutches,
-for their pirate ships continually scour the southern waters in quest
-of rich booty.
-
-“‘October the fourth: This morning we sighted land and were concerned
-altogether as to what should be our course of action. A fairly
-stiff breeze drove us steadily toward shore until we could plainly
-distinguish white sands and a profuseness of tropical vegetation that
-accordeth well with the faithful description of Florida made public by
-that gallant knight, Sir Walter Raleigh, whom His Majesty hath so illy
-recompensed for his great services. The warmth of the atmosphere also
-tended to confirm our judgment.
-
-“‘Whereas our good ship had suffered hard buffeting by wind and sea,
-we took counsel together and were of one mind that we should proceed
-toward shore and drop anchor until we could encompass such labor as was
-needful to render the ship seaworthy once more. For we were desirous of
-turning the _Dragon_ about in order to pursue a course due north which
-would, after many days, bring us to Virginia. And we weighed carefully
-the peril in which we stood that we might at any hour be attacked by
-hostile galleons and mayhap find ourselves overwhelmed and delivered
-into the cruel and merciless hands of the Spaniard. Yet we knew that we
-had no choice save to incur this hazard. Now it draweth toward sunset.
-This day we have labored diligently and accomplished much. Neither have
-we been molested.’”
-
-“The next entry is so dim I can hardly make it out,” Patsy announced.
-“It looks as though it might have been written in pencil. I didn’t know
-there were any lead pencils as early as 1618.”
-
-“There were, though,” Bee affirmed. “I remember reading in a magazine
-awhile ago that the first lead pencils were made in fifteen hundred and
-something. I can’t recall the exact date.”
-
-“Well, I’m sure this was written in pencil,” returned Patsy. “Don’t be
-impatient if I stumble a little in reading the entry for it’s awfully
-dim.”
-
-“Do go on,” implored Eleanor. “We’re keyed up to a high pitch of
-suspense to hear what happened next.”
-
-“‘October the fifth,’” Patsy obediently resumed. “‘This morning at
-sunrise we were attacked by a Spanish galleon which inflicted sore
-injuries to our good ship. Yet we rendered such sturdy account of
-ourselves as to force our enemy to draw off and speed away, I doubted
-not in order to bring other galleons against us. All that which we
-accomplished yesterday hath been undone by the divers volleys of shots
-which the enemy hurled against us.
-
-“‘The galleon having been put to flight we again took counsel. Rather
-than permit the passing of such valuables as each of us possessed into
-the greedy fingers of the Spaniard, we made haste to place all together
-in a strong chest. Each man attended to the gathering of his gold,
-silver and jewels into a small bag, his name being written upon paper
-and placed within the bag on top of his wealth. These bags we placed in
-the seaman’s chest together with a fine gold service which His Majesty
-had entrusted to our captain, to be delivered to a certain knight in
-Virginia.
-
-“‘When all was done the weight of the box was so great six men could
-scarcely bear it to the ship’s boat. To me was intrusted the command of
-these men, who were ordered to row to shore and there bury the box in
-the earth against the time when we might be able to return for it. This
-we did and found for the treasure a secure hiding place and buried it
-at the true sign of the _Dragon_, which was also His Majesty’s ship,
-sunk this day, so that we could not mistake it on our return. Our
-interest was then to proceed speedily to the ship, for we had agreed to
-weigh anchor and sail away, crippled though we were.
-
-“‘Yet while we floundered our way back to the shore, through well-nigh
-impassable green growths, infested with loathsome serpents which we
-slaughtered in numbers, we heard shots and knew that disaster had
-come upon our ship. So we made haste to gain the shore, but bethought
-ourselves to hide at the edge of the jungle rather than show ourselves
-before we had learned the cause of the firing. And we saw a mighty
-Spanish galleon bearing down on the _Dragon_ and knowing that we could
-do nothing were compelled to lie where we were and watch the unequal
-fight between our gallant ship and the great, high-built galleon.
-
-“‘But the _Dragon_ fought on until her masts were beaten overboard
-and all her tackle cut asunder and her upper work altogether razed,
-until, in effect, she evened with the water, nothing of her being left
-overhead either for flight or defense.
-
-“‘Then our captain, who well knew what torture awaited those on board
-the _Dragon_ when the Spaniard should set foot upon her, must surely
-have ordered the master gunner to split and sink the ship. This I
-believe, because suddenly on board the _Dragon_ a terrific explosion
-took place and she broke in two and sank with all her crew and
-passengers.
-
-“‘Then those of us who survived because of our errand on shore took
-counsel among ourselves and there seemed naught to be done save to go
-deeper into the jungle and hide ourselves until such time as we might
-be safe to come forth and trust ourselves to the mercy of the sea
-in our frail boat. For we had bethought ourselves when we landed to
-carry our boat across the sands and conceal it in the bushes. We were
-convinced that of the two the sea was possessed of more mercy than the
-Spaniard.
-
-“‘So we lay for a little and watched the galleon which went not away
-but hovered near where our ill-fated ship had disappeared beneath the
-waters. Presently we saw that which gave us sore alarm. We observed
-the putting down of a boat from the galleon’s side, and we counted ten
-men, all stoutly armed, who quickly betook themselves over the side and
-manned this boat as soon as it rode the waters. Then we were of the
-belief that this galleon had been lurking in the waters behind a small
-but thickly wooded tongue of land to the north of us, this tongue of
-land forming one end of a curve in the sands which in shape bore the
-likeness to a new moon.
-
-“‘We doubted not that the first galleon which we had worsted was in
-complicity with this second. We were convinced that both these had
-stolen upon us in the night. Whereas the first had been driven off by
-us, but with dear loss to ourselves. Those on board the second galleon
-must surely have observed our plight and thus bided their hour to
-attack us and complete our destruction. And while they thus waited it
-is certain they must in some manner have become aware of the lowering
-of the strong box into our boat and this same boat putting off to shore.
-
-“‘And we knew that we were undone and must seek such refuge as we
-might find in the jungle. Thereupon we set off in great haste, this
-time paying no heed to the disgusting serpents which frequently
-wriggled under our feet and hissed their displeasure of us, though by
-miracle we were stung by none of them.
-
-“‘Thus we continued to struggle deeper into the jungle with as much
-speed as we could, and we marveled that we had not yet heard our
-pursuers behind us. For we were determined to push ever forward until
-we discovered a fitting place of concealment in the hope that there we
-might escape being hunted out by them. We were resolved, should they
-discover us, to fight to the death, for we were well armed.
-
-“‘And after much painful wandering we came into a ravine and found a
-natural cavern the mouth of which was so overhung with broad-leaved
-green vines and obscured by bushes as to deceive us at first that aught
-of a cave was there. And we were overjoyed at this unexpected gain, for
-we reckoned that even as it had deceived us so it might deceive the
-Spaniard. Whereupon we severed with exceeding care enough of the vines
-as would permit us room to pass into the cavern and crept therein, one
-after another. And by good fortune one of the men had with him a bit
-of wax candle which we lighted by means of a flint and steel. And we
-were relieved to find the cave dry and free from scorpions and serpents.
-
-“It is now well past midday and still we are undiscovered. Having
-naught else to do I have taken my book, which never leaveth my person,
-and inscribed these facts therein by such dim light as filtereth
-through a little between our sheltering curtain of vines. If, by the
-grace of God, I survive this trial I shall ever regard this record as
-of higher interest than those which I have on divers occasions previous
-to this derived pleasure in inscribing herein. Should we escape the
-Spaniard we shall be still in an evil case to procure food, and defend
-ourselves against wild beasts and savages. These last we have not yet
-seen, yet I doubt not their presence in this untamed wilderness which
-now encompasseth us. We are resolved to be of steady courage and good
-cheer. Our faith reposeth in the Almighty who holdeth us in the hollow
-of His hand and who will deal with us as He deemeth best. We hold----’”
-
-Patsy suddenly stopped reading.
-
-“That’s all!” she exclaimed disappointedly. “It breaks off at ‘We
-hold’ with a long scrawl of the ‘d’ as though Sir John Holden had been
-suddenly interrupted.”
-
-“It’s wonderful!” Bee drew a long breath. “While Patsy was reading
-that last entry I imagined I could see those poor men fleeing for
-their lives through the jungle. The queer part of it is that it must
-be _true_. It’s almost as though this Sir John Holden, who lived three
-hundred years ago, had suddenly come back and spoken to us.”
-
-“Do you suppose the Spaniards found their hiding place and killed
-them?” asked Eleanor. “Do let me look at the ending of that last entry,
-Patsy.”
-
-Patsy handed the open book to Eleanor. Peering over her shoulder,
-Bee, Dolores and Mabel scrutinized it with her. For a time a lively
-discussion went on among the five girls concerning the book and the
-amazing narrative it contained. Its abrupt ending pointed to disaster
-to the fugitive Englishmen.
-
-“I believe the strong box these men buried was the treasure that old
-Manuel Fereda spent his life hunting for,” finally asserted Bee.
-“According to description, the place where they went ashore corresponds
-to the new moon curve of our bathing beach. Don’t you remember how the
-north end of the curve runs out to a point? The beach goes deep in
-above there in another shorter curve that makes a natural harbor. I
-noticed it the other day when we had the race. We swam just a little
-way past that point.”
-
-“I remember it now,” Patsy looked up, an almost startled expression in
-her eyes. “It doesn’t seem possible that all this I’ve been reading
-about ever happened on the very shore we’ve been using for a bathing
-beach. If it did happen there, then they buried the treasure somewhere
-in the woods back of it. How did Manuel come by this journal? That’s
-what I’d like to know.”
-
-“This journal has been handed down from one generation of Feredas to
-another,” returned Bee promptly. “What about Camillo de Fereda, the
-portrait cavalier? Judging from his costume in the picture he must
-have lived at about the same time as this journal was written. Eulalie
-told Dolores that he was a pirate and a murderer. He might have been
-on the very galleon that fought the _Dragon_. He might have been among
-the Spaniards who went ashore after Sir John and his men. Maybe the
-Spaniards found them and killed them all and brought back this book to
-the galleon. I’ve been trying to figure it out and that’s the way I
-think it was.”
-
-“It sounds very plausible,” agreed Patsy, much impressed. “Isn’t it
-maddening to find out this much only to realize that we’ll never know
-the rest? If there’s a treasure no wonder the Feredas could never find
-it. All Sir John says about it is that they buried it at the true sign
-of the _Dragon_. Now what did he mean by that?”
-
-“Well never know, nor will anyone else. If there’s really a treasure
-buried in the woods behind the beach it will probably stay there
-forever,” predicted Mabel.
-
-“I guess it will,” agreed Patsy. “I know we’ll never hunt for it. I can
-imagine Auntie’s face if I proposed digging up those woods to find it.
-I wonder what she’ll say about this journal? It’s a treasure in itself.
-It really belongs to you, Bee. You found it.”
-
-“Yes; but in your room,” reminded Beatrice.
-
-Nevertheless she looked rather wistfully at the little
-sheepskin-covered book. It was indeed a treasure worth having.
-
-“I’ll offer it to Auntie, Bee,” Patsy replied, noting the wistful look
-in Bee’s eyes. “We ought to consider her first. If she doesn’t care for
-it, it’s yours.”
-
-“Oh, no, _you_ keep it,” protested Bee. “I couldn’t accept it, really.”
-
-“We’ll settle that later. Oh, I forgot! We haven’t looked at the folded
-paper yet that fell out of the book.”
-
-Patsy turned to the table and picked up the forgotten paper.
-
-“It’s a letter,” she informed. Then her face clouded. “It’s written in
-Spanish,” she added disgustedly. “You can read it, Mab, I suppose.”
-
-“Patsy, _querida_, give me the letter,” eagerly begged Dolores, who as
-usual had played the silent but always avidly interested listener. “I
-would read it for you.”
-
-“Why, that’s so! I forgot all about your being Spanish, Dolores,”
-smiled Patsy.
-
-“Let Dolores read it,” urged Mabel. “She can make a much better
-translation of it than I.”
-
-“Go ahead, Dolores,” Patsy handed her the letter. Eleanor and Bee also
-echoed the request.
-
-Shyly delighted at being thus importuned by the girls she so greatly
-loved and admired, Dolores took the letter and scanned it with knitted
-brows:
-
-“‘_Mi querido hijo_,’” she read aloud. “That means, ‘My dear son.’ I
-will not read more of this in the Spanish, but try to tell you of it in
-the English as I read it in my own language. This it says:
-
- “‘It is long since I have written to you. I have waited for
- you to come to me, but you have not come. I grow old and but
- last month I received the wound in the side from an accursed
- English captain whose ship we set upon and captured. But he
- paid dearly for this outrage to my person. We put him and all
- on board to the torture.
-
- “‘But my wound heals not and promises yet to prove my death.
- Therefore I charge you to continue to search for the treasure
- which the accursed English brought ashore and buried on
- the morning when my galleon fought them and caused their
- destruction. You know well how we hunted down those who
- concealed the treasure and put them to torture. Stubborn pigs
- that they were, they perished, unconfessed.
-
- “‘Since that time I have searched long and frequently for this
- box which I doubt not to be filled with gold. I have wasted
- many hours over the stupid book, but understand not at all.
- Neither dare I give it to any who have knowledge of English
- lest the secret hiding place of the treasure thus become known
- to him who reads.
-
- “‘Therefore I charge you to come to me soon in order that I may
- deliver this book into your hands with such instructions as
- I have for you. For I am unable to come to you. When I shall
- have passed out of this life and into the eternal darkness, as
- I must surely do, since I have no belief in life after death,
- cease not to search for the treasure. From His Majesty I have
- received full title to the portion of land we marked off for
- our own. Thus it becomes yours when I have finished with it.
- Delay not, but come speedily if you would see your father once
- more.
-
- “‘DON CAMILLO DE FEREDA.’”
-
-“It’s the one thing we needed to complete our case.”
-
-It was Bee who shattered the hush that had fallen upon the group.
-
-“Yes. We know now that Don Camillo de Fereda _was_ really a pirate.
-That he commanded the galleon that finished the _Dragon_. We know what
-happened to Sir John Holden and his men and how the book came into the
-possession of the Feredas,” enumerated Patsy. “The letter and the book
-have been handed down from generation to generation because none of the
-Feredas ever found the treasure of Las Golondrinas.”
-
-“That was because of the wickedness of Don Camillo de Fereda,” asserted
-Dolores. “It was not intended that either he or any of this family
-should find. Because of it old Manuel died bitter and without faith.
-To Rosita it brought the madness. I believe that it has the curse laid
-upon it.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVI
-
-“THE TRUE SIGN OF THE ‘DRAGON’”
-
-
-The story of the treasure of Las Golondrinas was not to be thus
-easily dismissed from the minds of the Wayfarers. Quite the contrary,
-it became paramount as a topic of conversation. The journal of the
-unfortunate Englishman, Sir John Holden, and the letter written by Don
-Camillo de Fereda were duly exhibited to and read by Miss Martha and
-Mr. Carroll.
-
-Though both were considerably impressed by the girls’ find neither was
-in sympathy with Patsy’s half-jesting, half-earnest assertion: “It
-would be fun to poke around in the woods a little and hunt for the
-treasure, if we had the least bit of an idea what ‘the sign of the
-_Dragon_’ was.”
-
-Miss Carroll had promptly vetoed the “poking around in the woods”
-plan, appealing to Mr. Carroll to support her in prohibiting such a
-proceeding. He had been equally ready on his own account, however, to
-decry Patsy’s proposal.
-
-“Don’t allow this treasure story to take hold on your minds,” he had
-discouraged. “It’s highly interesting, of course, but that’s all.
-You’re not apt to discover a treasure that generations of Feredas
-failed to locate. They knew the ground thoroughly and failed. You know
-nothing of that jungle behind the beach.”
-
-With no one save Bee as an ally, Patsy’s ambition saw no prospect of
-realization. Still the treasure story remained uppermost in her mind.
-It haunted her, particularly during the morning excursions to and from
-the bathing beach. The portion of jungle through which the white, sandy
-beach-road ran became invested with new interest. Its green depths
-concealed a treasure, once the treasure of the Dragon, now the treasure
-of Las Golondrinas.
-
-“Do you suppose this part of the coast has changed very much since
-1618?” Patsy reflectively questioned one morning, as she and Bee lay on
-the warm sands sunning themselves after a long swim.
-
-“I don’t know.” Bee was gazing absently seaward. “You’re thinking about
-the treasure, of course,” she added with a smile.
-
-“Yes,” Patsy admitted. “Too bad Sir John wasn’t captain of the
-_Dragon_. He’d have kept a log instead of a journal, and in it he would
-have set down the ship’s exact position. How far it was from shore, I
-mean, and all that.”
-
-“I have an idea that the _Dragon_ anchored quite a way below this part
-of the beach,” declared Beatrice, “and not so very far from land. It’s
-just as Sir John said, the beach along here curves a little like a new
-moon. The upper end of the curve runs farther out into the water than
-the lower end. Above the upper end is the little bay where the galleons
-must have anchored in the night. You know how deep the water is there.
-If the _Dragon_ had been directly opposite this curve, those on board
-would have probably sighted the galleons and the captain would have
-tried to get away when the first one attacked him. They’d been fixing
-up the ship all that day, you know.”
-
-“Yes, that’s so,” nodded Patsy. “But where do you think the men landed
-who went ashore in the row-boat?”
-
-“That’s hard to guess,” returned Bee. “If the ship were anchored down
-there, they might have rowed in a straight line to land without being
-seen by the Spaniards. If the beach was then just as it is now, right
-along here would have been a better place for them to land than down
-there. Maybe the Spaniards had a lookout posted in the woods watching
-them.”
-
-“If they had, it’s funny that Don Camillo didn’t send some of his men
-to follow them right then, instead of waiting until after the attack,”
-argued Patsy.
-
-“I suppose he thought he had those poor Englishmen just where he wanted
-them,” replied Bee. “He knew that they couldn’t escape him. He thought,
-perhaps, that it would be easy to make them confess where they’d buried
-the box. You know history says that the Spanish adventurers who first
-came over here made a practice of torturing the Indians to find out
-where they kept their gold. Sir John and his men knew they’d be killed
-by Don Camillo even if they confessed, so they preferred to die by
-torture rather than tell the secret.”
-
-“It’s horrible to think of, isn’t it?” shuddered Patsy. “I’m glad we
-were born three hundred years later than those dangerous times. No
-one’s life was safe then. Say, Bee,” Patsy sat up with sudden energy.
-“I’m going to ask Auntie if we can’t walk a little way down the beach
-this morning. If she says ‘yes’ we’ll change our bathing suits and ask
-Dolores to go with us. I’m anxious to see how it looks down there at
-that lower end of the curve. Come on.”
-
-Springing to her feet, Patsy raced across the sands to where her aunt
-and Dolores were quietly sitting, each absorbed in a book. Dolores’
-fondness for Nature did not include any desire whatever for a close
-acquaintance with the ocean. No amount of persuasion on the part of the
-Wayfarers could induce her to go bathing with them.
-
-“Auntie, dear,” began Patsy in coaxing tones, as she and Bee came to
-a pause before the two on the sands, “do you care if we change our
-bathing suits and go for a little walk down the beach? We want you to
-go with us, Dolores. We won’t go far, Aunt Martha, and will be back in
-just a little while.”
-
-“Very well.” Miss Carroll looked up placidly from her reading. “I trust
-you, Dolores, to keep these two reckless girls out of mischief,” she
-added, turning to her companion.
-
-Dolores laid her book aside and rose in instant acquiescence to Patsy’s
-plea.
-
-“Surely, I will go with you, Patsy, _querida_,” she said in her soft
-voice. “Have no fear, Señora Martha, that I shall not keep the very
-stern eyes upon these two,” she mischievously assured Miss Carroll.
-
-“Wait a minute till I see if Mab and Nellie want to go,” Patsy said.
-Running down to the water’s edge, she called out her invitation to the
-Perry girls, who were industriously practising a new swimming stroke
-which Mr. Carroll had taught them on the previous day.
-
-“No, we don’t want to go,” declined Mabel. “We’re just beginning to get
-this stroke down fine. Go away, Patsy Carroll.”
-
-“Come along, Bee. The Perry children don’t appreciate us,” Patsy
-commented satirically.
-
-A little later, Bee and Patsy emerged from the bath house, ready for
-their walk. Accompanied by Dolores the trio started off down the beach.
-
-“We’ve been quite a little way up the beach, Dolores, but we’ve never
-gone a dozen yards down it,” remarked Patsy, as they strolled along in
-the sunshine. “We’re going as far as that point down there and maybe
-farther. We want to see how it looks on the other side of it. We were
-talking about the _Dragon_ this morning and----”
-
-“I beg of you, Patsy, _querida_, think no more of that horrible
-treasure.” Dolores had stopped short, her dark eyes full of distress.
-“It is forbidden by the _señora_ that you should walk in the jungle. I
-have given the promise to keep the care of you. So must I----”
-
-“Come along, goosie, dear.” Patsy laid gentle hold on Dolores’ arm.
-“We’re not going into the jungle to hunt for the stupid old treasure.
-We just want to go a little way and see things. Bee and I have an idea
-that the men from the _Dragon_ might have touched shore on the other
-side of the point when they rowed to land. We only want to see how it
-looks there.”
-
-“It is not so different from this,” Dolores declared, “except that
-beyond the point is the small inlet.”
-
-“Is that so?” Bee remarked in surprise. “I supposed that beyond the
-point was only a little bay. The beach is narrow at the point on
-account of the woods coming down so close to the water. That’s the way
-it is with the upper end of the curve, you know. Can we walk around
-the point and along the shore of the inlet for a little way without
-actually getting into the jungle?”
-
-“_Si_,” returned Dolores, “but not very far.”
-
-“Then let’s go as far as we dare,” proposed intrepid Patsy. “You lead
-the way, Dolores.”
-
-Presently arriving at the place where the beach itself was merely a
-strip of sand extending out into the water, the three girls rounded
-the point and walked along the sandy shore of the inlet.
-
-They had gone only a few steps when Bee stopped short and pointed out
-to sea.
-
-“The _Dragon_ might have been anchored right over there, Patsy,” she
-asserted. “This would have been a splendid place for the men in the
-row-boat to land.”
-
-“Maybe they did land here, and struck off into the jungle, right there,
-where the inlet begins,” surmised Patsy. “Let’s follow the shore of the
-inlet. It’s almost as wide as this bit of beach and doesn’t look snaky.
-As long as we don’t get into the jungly part of the jungle we’re safe
-enough.”
-
-“I think it will be all right for us to go up it a few rods if we stick
-to the shore,” decided Bee. “It looks so pretty up there under those
-trees that hang over the water. Truly, Dolores, we’re not thinking
-about the treasure now. It certainly wasn’t buried along the shore of
-the inlet. Why, the journal never mentioned an inlet. You go ahead and
-we’ll follow. You know the ground.”
-
-Reassured by Bee’s words, Dolores first hunted about for a good-sized
-snake stick, then reluctantly took the lead. The trio soon reached
-the mouth of the inlet and continued up one side of it for a short
-distance. The farther they went the narrower grew the sandy shore,
-lying even with the jungle itself. Over the inlet hung a kind of white
-haze, appearing to rise from the water.
-
-“We’re in the jungle and yet not in it,” cheerfully commented Patsy.
-“How misty that water looks.”
-
-She had hardly spoken when Bee uttered a sharp exclamatory “Oh!”
-
-Walking ahead, Dolores had come upon a noisy puff adder curled up on
-the shore. While it puffed its resentment at being disturbed, she
-deftly caught it up on the end of the stick and tossed it, hissing,
-into the water.
-
-“It is not harmful,” she explained, “yet I have the sorrow to see it,
-because it is the snake, and all snakes are the sign of evil. Now we
-should perhaps turn back. You have seen----”
-
-Her low, musical voice suddenly trailed off into a horrified gasp.
-Simultaneously three pairs of eyes had glimpsed a terrifying something
-rising up through the mist from the inlet’s quiet waters. As it
-continued to rise they caught a fleeting impression of a grotesque,
-flat, wrinkled head, composed chiefly of a heavy upper lip from which
-depended a long trail of green. In its flipper-like arms the ugly
-monster held a grayish object, clasped close to its vast, shapeless
-body.
-
-“It is an evil thing!” shrieked Dolores. Panic-stricken, she reverted
-to her old wood nymph tactics and bolted straight into the jungle,
-Patsy and Beatrice following wildly after.
-
-“Dolores!” at last screamed Bee in desperation. “Wait for us!”
-
-The shrill appeal checked the badly scared wood nymph’s headlong flight
-long enough for Bee and Patsy to come up with her. Breathless though
-she was, Bee’s brief terror had apparently taken wing. She was now
-smiling broadly.
-
-“We’re a set of geese!” she exclaimed. “Do you know what our horrible
-monster is? I do. It’s nothing but a meek, harmless manatee!”
-
-“What, then, is a manatee?” inquired Dolores, in tones that indicated
-doubt that so terrible a monster as she had just seen could possibly be
-harmless.
-
-“Oh, it’s an animal something like a seal, only a lot larger, that
-lives in the sea. It eats nothing but plants and grass and is as
-harmless as a kitten. I’ve seen pictures of manatees, but never saw a
-real one before,” explained Bee. “The minute after we started to run,
-I guessed what it was we’d seen. They live in lagoons and the mouths
-of rivers that run into the sea and inlets like this. The poor thing
-was holding up its baby manatee for us to see and we never stopped to
-admire it!”
-
-“Let’s go back and look at it,” said Patsy. “We’ve got to get out of
-this jungle as soon as ever we can. We’ll have to go back the way we
-came, I suppose. Auntie will be awfully cross with me for this. She’ll
-blame me for the whole business.”
-
-“From here it is not so far to the jungle road,” informed Dolores.
-“I know the little path to it. That will be best for us to take, I
-believe.”
-
-“All right,” acquiesced Bee, “only do let’s stop and rest a little
-first. That wild run of ours took most of my breath. There’s a nice,
-clean place under that big tree. A five-minutes’ stop there won’t do us
-any harm.”
-
-Pausing only to break off a leafy branch from a stunted sapling, Bee
-walked over to the spot she had designated and energetically swept it,
-a precautionary measure against lurking wood-ticks and scorpions. Then
-she dropped down on the dry ground with a little sigh of relief.
-
-Dolores seated herself beside Bee. Patsy, however, made no move to sit
-down. Instead, she stopped half way to the tree and gazed about her
-with alert, interested eyes.
-
-“Look at that dandy big rock!” she exclaimed, pointing to a huge
-boulder a little to the left of where she was standing. “I can climb
-up on it as easy as anything. It will be a fine perch. No snakes or
-scorpions or horrid old wood-ticks can get me up there.”
-
-The rock on which Patsy proposed to perch was perhaps five feet high
-and correspondingly thick through. It measured at least eight feet
-across. One end of it tapered down to a blunt point, thereby furnishing
-Patsy an easy means of reaching its rather flat top.
-
-“Hurray!” was her jubilant exclamation when a moment later she stood on
-top of the boulder and waved a triumphant hand to her companions. “The
-world is mine!”
-
-Patsy made an elaborate bow, first to the right, then to the left. Her
-eyes coming to rest on the pointed end of the boulder she called out:
-
-“What does this end of the rock make you think of?”
-
-“It reminds me of a rock,” jibed Bee. “I can’t see that it looks like
-anything else.”
-
-“That’s because you’re not up here,” retorted Patsy. “Standing on the
-top, looking down, this end is like an alligator’s head. No it isn’t,
-either. It’s more like the head of a queer, prehistoric monster. Why,
-girls!” Patsy’s voice suddenly rose to an excited squeal. “Come up
-here, quick! I want to _show_ you something!”
-
-Quite in the dark regarding the cause of Patsy’s agitation, Bee and
-Dolores lost no time, however, in scrambling up on the boulder.
-
-“Look!” Patsy pointed a shaking finger downward. “Can’t you see it?
-Don’t you know what it’s like?”
-
-“It does look a little like one of those prehistoric monster’s heads,”
-agreed Bee.
-
-“It looks like more than that. It looks like a _dragon’s_ head. Now
-I know what Sir John Holden meant when he wrote, ‘And we buried the
-treasure at the true sign of the Dragon, which was also His Majesty’s
-ship sunk this day.’ He and his men came here with the box and
-found this rock. He must have climbed to the top of it to take an
-observation. He must have seen the queer resemblance of this end of the
-rock to a dragon’s head. He thought it would be a good thing to bury
-the box near it, because then they couldn’t mistake the place if they
-came back again. I truly believe that somewhere in the ground around
-this rock and close to it is the treasure of Las Golondrinas!”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVII
-
-THE TREASURE OF LAS GOLONDRINAS
-
-
-Two mornings after Patsy’s amazing discovery of what she believed to
-be the place where Sir John Holden had buried the treasure box, an
-interested but not entirely credulous delegation set out for the jungle.
-
-It consisted of the Wayfarers, Dolores, Mr. and Miss Carroll, Uncle
-Jemmy and two negro laborers. These last were laden with picks and
-shovels. It had taken lengthy and insistent pleading on Patsy’s part to
-bring about this much-desired state of affairs.
-
-Despite the fact that she had been soundly taken to task by her aunt
-and her father for disobedience of orders, her reiterated plea was:
-“You may scold me as much as you like, Dad, if only you’ll send
-somebody to dig up the earth around Dragon Rock.” Thus Patsy had named
-the big boulder. She was firmly convinced that her theory concerning
-the location of the treasure would prove correct, if investigated
-thoroughly.
-
-Demurring at first, the fascination of treasure hunting had finally
-laid sufficient hold on Mr. Carroll to the point of consenting to humor
-Patsy’s belief. Hence the party that, guided by Dolores, was now on its
-way to Dragon Rock.
-
-To the Wayfarers it was the great hour of their young lives. They
-regarded the expedition as the very height of adventure. Miss Martha
-was also rather stirred up over it, though she maintained her usual
-lofty attitude of pretending she was not. Dolores was solemnly
-superstitious lest evil might overtake the whole party. Mr. Carroll
-was frankly sceptical. As for the darkies, they had no inkling of what
-it was all about. Neither were they in the least concerned. Sufficient
-that Massa Carroll “wanted dem woods dug up.”
-
-Finally arrived at Dragon Rock, Patsy constituted herself master of
-ceremonies, gravely escorting her father to the top of the boulder to
-show him the dragon’s head. Mabel and Eleanor also clambered up to see
-and were duly impressed. Miss Martha, however, had too much dignity for
-rock climbing.
-
-[Illustration: “Look!” Patsy pointed a shaking finger downward. “Can’t
-you see it?”]
-
-“Well, Patsy, I guess the boys might as well start digging,” was Mr.
-Carroll’s opinion after a brief inspection of the ground around the
-boulder. “Better stand well back, all of you. I’m going to have a
-circular ditch dug around the rock, say about four feet wide and four
-deep. If there is really a box buried there, it is probably buried
-close to the rock. That’s the theory I’m going to proceed on.”
-
-With this, Mr. Carroll left her and went over to where Uncle Jemmy and
-his two assistants stood leaning on their picks, indolently awaiting
-his orders. Instructing them as to the width and depth of the ditch he
-purposed they should dig, he set them to work and stood watching them
-for a moment, a half-amused smile on his face.
-
-“We never thought we’d ever go treasure-hunting, did we, Martha?” he
-remarked as he joined the interested group of spectators, drawn up a
-little to the left of the rock. “It takes me back to the days when we
-were youngsters and read dozens of treasure stories and wondered if we
-should ever be lucky enough to stumble upon a real treasure.”
-
-“Judging from appearances, I should say our ideas haven’t changed
-much,” dryly returned his sister. “We are as deep in the mud as Patsy
-is in the mire.”
-
-“What are you going to do with this great treasure, when we find it,
-Patsy?” humorously questioned her father.
-
-“Give half of it to Dolores, and then we’ll divide the other half among
-us,” returned Patsy.
-
-This immediately evoked a chorus of laughing approval on the part of
-everyone save Dolores, who protested stoutly against any such division.
-
-Meanwhile the three darkies had proceeded stolidly with their task.
-The loose sandy soil made digging comparatively easy and before long a
-shallow ditch circled the rock. As they continued to work at deepening
-it, conversation among the watchers died out and a curious hush fell
-upon the group, broken only by the forest sounds around them and the
-dull grating of pick and shovel coming in contact with the sand.
-
-Patsy, however, could not resist going over to the ditch from time to
-time for a close-up view of it. She was beginning to feel a keen sense
-of disappointment. It looked as though her wonderful treasure theory
-was about to tumble down.
-
-“I guess I was away off on my sign of the Dragon,” she ruefully
-admitted, as she returned to her friends after a gloomy inspection of
-the sandy ditch. “Where Uncle Jemmy’s digging, he’s got down at least
-three feet and there’s not a sign of----”
-
-Patsy did not finish. A sudden hail from Uncle Jemmy of: “Ah reckon,
-Massa Carroll, dey am suthin’ heah ’sides dirt!” caused her to dash
-back to the ditch. Immediately the others hurried after her to the spot.
-
-Standing in the ditch the old man was tapping lightly with his shovel
-on a partially uncovered oblong of wood that appeared to form the top
-of a box or casket. As nearly as could be seen it was about three feet
-long and eighteen inches wide.
-
-“Oh, Uncle Jemmy, do please hurry and dig it out!” implored Patsy,
-almost tumbling into the ditch in her excitement. “It’s the treasure
-box! It truly is! I was right after all about the sign of the Dragon!”
-
-“Move back, girls,” ordered Mr. Carroll. “Give Jemmy room to get at the
-thing. This certainly dashes me.”
-
-Amid a babble of excited comment, the party moved back from the
-opening, breathlessly watching Uncle Jemmy as he loosened the earth
-around the box. It was so tightly packed as to suggest the labor of
-purposeful hands. It needed but a little more effort on the part of the
-old man to reveal what was undoubtedly a seaman’s chest, belonging to a
-remote period.
-
-Next instant Mr. Carroll had stepped into the ditch beside the old man
-and was bending over the old chest. Above, a circle of eager faces
-peered down at him. The other two darkies had also dropped shovels and
-rushed to the scene, mouths agape with curiosity, eyes wildly rolling.
-
-Grasping one end of the chest with both hands, Mr. Carroll received
-a surprise. The lid of the chest moved under his hands. A concerted
-murmur came from above as he lifted it free. Then the murmur welled to
-a united shout. What the watchers had expected to see, none of them had
-been prepared to state. What they really saw was something entirely
-different from any idea each might have formed of the lost treasure of
-Las Golondrinas.
-
-Following the shout that had ascended, came an instant of silence. It
-was Patsy who first spoke.
-
-“Lift the box out of there, Dad,” she said in a rather unsteady tone.
-“Let us have it up where we can get a good look at the wonderful
-treasure.”
-
-Suddenly she burst into a peal of high, clear laughter which went the
-rounds of the amazed treasure-seekers. Amid almost hysterical mirth the
-chest was raised from its resting place.
-
-“It’s ready to fall to pieces,” commented Mr. Carroll, as he carefully
-set the box on the ground. “It’s made of good tough wood or it wouldn’t
-have held together all these years. Well, Patsy, what do you think of
-your treasure now?”
-
-“Not much, except that Sir John Holden never put that stuff in there.
-It tells its own story, though.”
-
-Kneeling beside the chest she reached into it and fished up a rudely
-fashioned tomahawk, the blade of which was merely a sharp stone.
-
-“This, and this,” she again reached down and added a long,
-wicked-looking arrow-head to the tomahawk, “tell me that the people who
-really found the treasure were the Indians. Don’t you remember that Sir
-John wrote in the journal that he didn’t doubt that there were Indians
-lurking about in this jungle? They were watching when Sir John and his
-men buried the treasure. After they’d gone, the Indians came here and
-dug it up.”
-
-“It seems queer that they didn’t just throw the chest away instead of
-burying it again with those queer weapons in it,” declared Mabel.
-
-The Wayfarers were now down on their knees in a little circle about the
-chest, interestedly lifting and inspecting the few articles it still
-contained. There was another tomahawk, a murderous-looking mace and
-a number of stone arrow-heads of various sizes. This, then, was the
-treasure of Las Golondrinas. For it, one Fereda had taken many lives,
-and because of it, his descendants had wasted long years of bitter,
-unavailing search.
-
-“It strikes me that the Indians of three hundred years ago liked to
-play jokes,” was Mr. Carroll’s opinion. “That seems to be about the
-only explanation of this stuff being here in the box. They took the
-treasure and decided to leave a grim message for the other fellows if
-they ever came back for their valuables. It was their way of saying
-‘Stung!’ I guess.”
-
-“We’ve all been _stung_,” giggled Patsy.
-
-“Too bad it wasn’t that wicked old Camillo instead of nice harmless
-people like us,” said Bee.
-
-“And we were going to give Dolores half of it,” mourned Patsy. “Now
-we’ve nothing to give her except a war-club and a couple of old
-tomahawks which she certainly won’t have any use for.”
-
-This raised a laugh in which even Dolores joined. She had looked unduly
-solemn since the beginning of the expedition. Now for the first time
-her sober face lighted into its wonderful radiant beauty.
-
-“For this I am glad,” she declared earnestly. “To find in this box gold
-and jewels would have been the sorrow, because such treasure cost some
-lives. So it was surely evil. Now we know all and thus Las Golondrinas
-which was always the unlucky place becomes the lucky. So shall good
-fortune stay here now, for always.
-
-“I have read in the books the stories of the princesses who, because
-they were good and lovely, broke the wicked spells of the bad ones.
-So is _querida_ Patsy, the dear princess, who because she would not
-give up seeking the treasure, broke the spell and made all good again
-here. There is now no more of mystery, so there will be no more of the
-unhappiness. _Querida_ princess, I kiss your hand.”
-
-Carried away by her own fanciful comparisons, Dolores caught Patsy’s
-hand and kissed it.
-
-“You’re the sweetest old dear alive.” Patsy wound her arms about
-Dolores. “Since you will have it that I am a princess, I’ll add a
-little more to the tale. Princess Patsy freed a wood nymph from a
-wicked witch. Then the wood nymph was so grateful to the princess that
-she promised never to go away from her. She said, ‘I will go to the far
-North with you and the Señora Martha and the Señor Carroll and live in
-your house and become your very own sister.’ Isn’t that what she said,
-Dolores?”
-
-A flood of color rushed to Dolores’ cheeks. Her great dark eyes grew
-misty. For a moment she stood silent, fighting for self-control. Then
-she raised her eyes timidly to Miss Martha’s dignified countenance. It
-was a smiling face now and very tender. Next her glance wandered to
-Mr. Carroll as though in question. What she saw in his face was also
-reassuring.
-
-“Isn’t that what she said, Dolores?” repeated Patsy encouragingly.
-
-“_Si_,” was the soft answer.
-
-And thus the future of Dolores the wood nymph was settled, thereby
-proving that for her at least the era of good fortune had begun.
-
-“Dad,” began Patsy that evening at dinner, “when are we going on that
-expedition into the Everglades? We’ve only two more weeks’ vacation,
-you know.”
-
-“We can go next week, if you like,” amiably responded her father.
-
-“I was in hopes you had forgotten all about that, Patsy,” complained
-her aunt. “Haven’t you had enough excitement? Why not settle down
-quietly for the rest of the time we are to be here? I can’t say I enjoy
-the prospect of such a jaunt.”
-
-“Why, Auntie!” Patsy stared across the table at Miss Martha in beaming
-amazement. “Are _you_ really going with us? I thought you said----”
-
-“So I did,” cut off her aunt, “but I have changed my mind. I’ve
-discovered that I can walk around in a jungle as well as the rest of
-you. In fact, I prefer it to staying alone in this house. I shall never
-feel easy until that hobgoblin collection of portraits is cleared out
-of the gallery and the whole place renovated.”
-
-“That reminds me, Eulalie never answered our letter,” commented
-Beatrice.
-
-“Well, we don’t care now. We solved all the mysteries of Las
-Golondrinas for ourselves,” asserted Patsy. “We know all about the
-painted cavalier, we captured the ghost, found a secret door, a secret
-drawer and the treasure of Las Golondrinas. We’ve got the journal of
-Sir John Holden. It’s a perfect jewel in itself, and I’ve found a
-foster-sister. Can you beat it?”
-
-She cast a roguish glance at her aunt as she perpetrated this slangy
-offense.
-
-“Our vacation’s almost over, but we’ve another one coming next summer,”
-she continued. “We’re five Wayfarers now, and we’ll wayfare into
-strange lands and find new and curious things. The Wayfarers can’t be
-like other people, you know. They just have to do startling things
-and live in startling places. They’ve proved that twice--and oh, joy!
-Summer’s coming. When it does come and the Wayfarers take the road
-again, who knows what wonderful things may happen to them?”
-
-How the Wayfarers spent the summer vacation, to which Patsy was already
-looking forward with eager zest, will be told in the third volume of
-this series entitled, “PATSY CARROLL IN THE GOLDEN WEST.”
-
-THE END
-
-
-
-
-THE JANE ALLEN COLLEGE SERIES
-
-BY EDITH BANCROFT
-
-_12mo. Illustrated. With cover inlay and jacket in colors_
-
-_Price per volume, $1.00_
-
-[Illustration]
-
-_This series is a decided departure from the stories usually written of
-life in the modern college for young women. An authoritative account of
-the life of the college girl as it is lived today._
-
-1. JANE ALLEN OF THE SUB TEAM
-
-When Jane Allen left her home in Montana, to go East to Wellington
-College, she was sure that she could never learn to endure the
-restrictions of college life.
-
-2. JANE ALLEN: RIGHT GUARD
-
-Jane Allen becomes a sophomore at Wellington College, but she has to
-face a severe trial that requires all her courage and character. The
-result is a triumph for being faithful to an ideal.
-
-3. JANE ALLEN: CENTER
-
-Lovable Jane Allen as Junior experiences delightful days of work and
-play. Jane, and her chum, Judith, win leadership in class office,
-social and athletic circles of Sophs and Juniors.
-
-4. JANE ALLEN: JUNIOR
-
-Jane Allen’s college experiences, as continued in “Jane Allen, Junior,”
-afford the chance for a brilliant story. A rude, country girl forces
-her way into Wellington under false pretenses.
-
-5. JANE ALLEN: SENIOR
-
-Jane and Judith undertake Social Service, wherein they find actual
-problems more thrilling than were those of the “indoor sports.”
-
-_Send For Our Free Illustrated Catalogue_
-
-CUPPLES & LEON COMPANY, Publishers New York
-
-
-
-
-THE PATSY CARROLL SERIES
-
-BY GRACE GORDON
-
-_12mo. Illustrated. With cover inlay and jacket in colors_
-
-_Price per volume, $1.00_
-
-[Illustration]
-
-_This fascinating series is permeated with the vibrant atmosphere
-of the great outdoors. The vacations spent by Patsy Carroll and her
-chums, the girl Wayfarers, in the north, east, south and west of the
-wonderland of our country, comprise a succession of tales unsurpassed
-in plot and action._
-
-PATSY CARROLL AT WILDERNESS LODGE
-
-Patsy Carroll succeeds in coaxing her father to lease one of the
-luxurious camps at Lake Placid, for the summer. Established at
-Wilderness Lodge, the Wayfarers, as they call themselves, find they are
-the center of a mystery which revolves about a missing will. How the
-girls solve the mystery makes a splendid story.
-
-PATSY CARROLL UNDER SOUTHERN SKIES
-
-Patsy Carroll and her three chums spend their Easter vacation in an
-old mansion in Florida. An exciting mystery develops. It is solved by
-a curious acrostic found by Patsy. This leads to very exciting and
-satisfactory results, making a capital story.
-
-PATSY CARROLL IN THE GOLDEN WEST
-
-The Wayfarers journey to the dream city of the Movie World in the
-Golden West, and there become a part of a famous film drama.
-
-PATSY CARROLL IN OLD NEW ENGLAND
-
-Set in the background of the Tercentenary of the landing of the
-Pilgrims, celebrated in the year 1920, the story of Patsy Carroll
-in Old New England offers a correct word picture of this historical
-event and into it is woven a fascinating tale of the adventures of the
-Wayfarers.
-
-_Send For Our Free Illustrated Catalogue_
-
-CUPPLES & LEON COMPANY, Publishers New York
-
-
-
-
-THE MOTOR GIRLS SERIES
-
-By MARGARET PENROSE
-
-Author of the highly successful “Dorothy Dale Series”
-
-12mo. Illustrated. Price per volume, $1.00 postpaid.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-Since the enormous success of our “Motor Boys Series,” by Clarence
-Young, we have been asked to get out a similar series for girls. No
-one is better equipped to furnish these tales than Mrs. Penrose, who,
-besides being an able writer, is an expert automobilist.
-
- THE MOTOR GIRLS
- _or A Mystery of the Road_
-
- THE MOTOR GIRLS ON A TOUR
- _or Keeping a Strange Promise_
-
- THE MOTOR GIRLS AT LOOKOUT BEACH
- _or In Quest of the Runaways_
-
- THE MOTOR GIRLS THROUGH NEW ENGLAND
- _or Held by the Gypsies_
-
- THE MOTOR GIRLS ON CEDAR LAKE
- _or The Hermit of Fern Island_
-
- THE MOTOR GIRLS ON THE COAST
- _or The Waif from the Sea_
-
- THE MOTOR GIRLS ON CRYSTAL BAY
- _or The Secret of the Red Oar_
-
- THE MOTOR GIRLS ON WATERS BLUE
- _or The Strange Cruise of the Tartar_
-
- THE MOTOR GIRLS AT CAMP SURPRISE
- _or The Cave in the Mountain_
-
- THE MOTOR GIRLS IN THE MOUNTAINS
- _or The Gypsy Girl’s Secret_
-
-CUPPLES & LEON CO., Publishers, NEW YORK
-
-
-
-
-THE DOROTHY DALE SERIES
-
-BY MARGARET PENROSE
-
-Author of “The Motor Girls Series,” “Radio Girls Series,” &c.
-
-_12 mo. Illustrated_
-
-_Price per volume, $1.00, postpaid_
-
-[Illustration]
-
-_Dorothy Dale is the daughter of an old Civil War veteran who is
-running a weekly newspaper in a small Eastern town. Her sunny
-disposition, her fun-loving ways and her trials and triumphs make
-clean, interesting and fascinating reading. The Dorothy Dale Series is
-one of the most popular series of books for girls ever published._
-
- DOROTHY DALE: A GIRL OF TO-DAY
- DOROTHY DALE AT GLENWOOD SCHOOL
- DOROTHY DALE’S GREAT SECRET
- DOROTHY DALE AND HER CHUMS
- DOROTHY DALE’S QUEER HOLIDAYS
- DOROTHY DALE’S CAMPING DAYS
- DOROTHY DALE’S SCHOOL RIVALS
- DOROTHY DALE IN THE CITY
- DOROTHY DALE’S PROMISE
- DOROTHY DALE IN THE WEST
- DOROTHY DALE’S STRANGE DISCOVERY
- DOROTHY DALE’S ENGAGEMENT
- DOROTHY DALE TO THE RESCUE
-
-_Send For Our Free Illustrated Catalogue_
-
-CUPPLES & LEON COMPANY, Publishers New York
-
-
-
-
-THE RUTH FIELDING SERIES
-
-BY ALICE B. EMERSON
-
-[Illustration]
-
-_12mo. Illustrated. Jacket in full colors_
-
-_Price per volume, 65 cents, postpaid_
-
-Ruth Fielding was an orphan and came to live with her miserly uncle.
-Her adventures and travels make stories that will hold the interest of
-every reader.
-
-Ruth Fielding is a character that will live in juvenile fiction.
-
- 1. RUTH FIELDING OF THE RED MILL
- 2. RUTH FIELDING AT BRIARWOOD HALL
- 3. RUTH FIELDING AT SNOW CAMP
- 4. RUTH FIELDING AT LIGHTHOUSE POINT
- 5. RUTH FIELDING AT SILVER RANCH
- 6. RUTH FIELDING ON CLIFF ISLAND
- 7. RUTH FIELDING AT SUNRISE FARM
- 8. RUTH FIELDING AND THE GYPSIES
- 9. RUTH FIELDING IN MOVING PICTURES
- 10. RUTH FIELDING DOWN IN DIXIE
- 11. RUTH FIELDING AT COLLEGE
- 12. RUTH FIELDING IN THE SADDLE
- 13. RUTH FIELDING IN THE RED CROSS
- 14. RUTH FIELDING AT THE WAR FRONT
- 15. RUTH FIELDING HOMEWARD BOUND
- 16. RUTH FIELDING DOWN EAST
- 17. RUTH FIELDING IN THE GREAT NORTHWEST
- 18. RUTH FIELDING ON THE ST. LAWRENCE
- 19. RUTH FIELDING TREASURE HUNTING
- 20. RUTH FIELDING IN THE FAR NORTH
- 21. RUTH FIELDING AT GOLDEN PASS
- 22. RUTH FIELDING IN ALASKA
- 23. RUTH FIELDING AND HER GREAT SCENARIO
-
-CUPPLES & LEON COMPANY, Publishers New York
-
-
-
-
-THE BETTY GORDON SERIES
-
-BY ALICE B. EMERSON
-
-_12mo. Cloth. Illustrated. Jacket in full colors._
-
-_Price per volume, 65 cents, postpaid_
-
-[Illustration]
-
- 1. BETTY GORDON AT BRAMBLE FARM
- _or The Mystery of a Nobody_
-
- At twelve Betty is left an orphan.
-
- 2. BETTY GORDON IN WASHINGTON
- _or Strange Adventures in a Great City_
-
- Betty goes to the National Capitol to find her uncle and
- has several unusual adventures.
-
- 3. BETTY GORDON IN THE LAND OF OIL
- _or The Farm That Was Worth a Fortune_
-
- From Washington the scene is shifted to the great oil
- fields of our country. A splendid picture of the oil field
- operations of today.
-
- 4. BETTY GORDON AT BOARDING SCHOOL
- _or The Treasure of Indian Chasm_
-
- Seeking treasures of Indian Chasm makes interesting reading.
-
- 5. BETTY GORDON AT MOUNTAIN CAMP
- _or The Mystery of Ida Bellethorne_
-
- At Mountain Camp Betty found herself in the midst of a
- mystery involving a girl whom she had previously met in
- Washington.
-
- 6. BETTY GORDON AT OCEAN PARK
- _or School Chums on the Boardwalk_
-
- A glorious outing that Betty and her chums never forgot.
-
- 7. BETTY GORDON AND HER SCHOOL CHUMS
- _or Bringing the Rebels to Terms_
-
- Rebellious students, disliked teachers and mysterious
- robberies make a fascinating story.
-
- 8. BETTY GORDON AT RAINBOW RANCH
- _or Cowboy Joe’s Secret_
-
- Betty and her chums have a grand time in the saddle.
-
- 9. BETTY GORDON IN MEXICAN WILDS
- _or The Secret of the Mountains_
-
- Betty receives a fake telegram and finds both Bob and
- herself held for ransom in a mountain cave.
-
- 10. BETTY GORDON AND THE LOST PEARL
- _or A Mystery of the Seaside_
-
- Betty and her chums go to the ocean shore for a vacation
- and there Betty becomes involved in the disappearance of a
- string of pearls worth a fortune.
-
-_Send For Our Free Illustrated Catalogue_
-
-CUPPLES & LEON COMPANY, Publishers New York
-
-
-
-
-
-End of Project Gutenberg's Patsy Carroll Under Southern Skies, by Grace Gordon
-
-*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PATSY CARROLL UNDER SOUTHERN SKIES ***
-
-***** This file should be named 53361-0.txt or 53361-0.zip *****
-This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
- http://www.gutenberg.org/5/3/3/6/53361/
-
-Produced by Juliet Sutherland and the Online Distributed
-Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
-States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive
-specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
-eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook
-for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports,
-performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given
-away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks
-not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the
-trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country outside the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you
- are located before using this ebook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The
-Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the
-mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its
-volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous
-locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt
-Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to
-date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and
-official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-For additional contact information:
-
- Dr. Gregory B. Newby
- Chief Executive and Director
- gbnewby@pglaf.org
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
-spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works.
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
-